Download Product Manual - Gibson Guitar Electric_ Acoustic and

Document Sample
Download Product Manual - Gibson Guitar Electric_ Acoustic and Powered By Docstoc
					           18




     18
PRINCESS
            R
WARNING! Although the beam emitted by the laser diodes is nearly invisible, it may cause severe damage to
the human eye. Use an infrared indicator to check the laser beam.




                                           CLASS 1
                                        LASER PRODUCT
                                                           3122 110 03420




ATTENTION!
The CD mechanism and many ICs are extremely susceptible to electrostatic discharges. The photo diodes
and the laser diode are more sensitive to discharges than MOS ICs. Careless handling may immediately de-
stroy components or can drastically reduce life expectancy of these components so that it will lead to failure af-
ter several weeks or even months of use.

Before you touch the player, discharge your hands and tools by touching a grounded metal part of the jukebox,
such as the amplifier or the mechanism chassis. Make sure that you are connected via a wrist wrap with resis-
tance to the same potential as the chassis of the jukebox. Keep parts and tools at the same potential.

If you remove the player in case of repair or for transport, short the harness with a short circuit plug.

When repairing, observe all valid safety rules. Do not change the original condition of the jukebox. Use original
spare parts only.


                                                  ESD




This manual belongs to machines equipped with program versiones 4.09 (or higher).

Subject to alterations.
1         Unpacking - Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1       Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2       Removal of shipping guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3       Verification of power voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4       Wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.5       Speaker connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.6       Power on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2         Loading compact discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1       Position of CDs in the magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2       Remove magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3       CD handling precautions - CD and player cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.4       Inserting title cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5       Programming number of CDs in the magazines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.6       Adjustment of the page limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3         Coin operation or free play? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1       Coin operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2       Free play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.3       Test credit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

4         Track selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.1       How to select a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2       I do not like this track - the button CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.3       Albumplay - playing a whole CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

5         Automatic random select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

6         Volume, sound and balance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.1       Volume, sound and balance control - amplifier F91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.2       Volume, sound and balance control - amplifier K99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

7         Coin and price settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.1       Price settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.2       Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.3       Free play programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.4       Color codes of coin input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.5       Selecting, displaying and programming of top tunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

8         Programming short view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

9         Jukebox programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
9.1       Calling service programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
9.2       Programming of time functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
9.3       Programming of the Playstimulator (random selections without coin insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
9.4       BackGround Music (BGM), level 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
9.5       Happy hour pricing (additional bonus plays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
9.6       Number of tracks played successively on the same disc, level 2 button 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
9.7       Disabling single tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35


PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                           1
9.8         Location or Identification number, level 1 button 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
9.9         Album selection and memory reset by power off, level 1 button 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

10          Data retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
10.1        Operator data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

11          Amplifier F91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
11.1        Verification of power voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
11.2        Position of fuses and plug connectors on the power amp board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
11.3        The first power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
11.4        Pre-settings for volume, bass, treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
11.5        Speaker connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
11.6        Connecting external speakers in operating mode 2-CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
11.7        BGM mode - volume attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
11.8        Automatic volume control (AVC) and clipping stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
11.9        Overdrive protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
11.10       Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
11.11       Tape input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

12          Amplifier K99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
12.1        Device description of the amplifier K99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
12.2        Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
12.3        Verification of power voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
12.4        Position of fuses and plug connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
12.5        The first power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
12.6        Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
12.7        The infrared remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
12.8        Treble and bass control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
12.9        Automatic volume correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
12.10       Background Music - volume attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
12.11       External speaker connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
12.12       External amplifier connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
12.13       Disabling the internal mute circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
12.14       Input selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

13          70v output transformer (0043157) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
13.1        Hints of connectable speaker loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
13.2        Determination of the connectable speaker power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
13.3        Hints for speaker connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
13.4        Connection of 70v systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

14          Technician Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
14.1        Service data, level 4 button 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

15          Function tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
15.1        Digital display test / EPROM-version, level 1 button 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
15.2        Mechanism single step tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
15.3        Light gate tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68


        2                                                                                                                              PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
15.4      CD-PRO function tests, level 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

16        Integrated test program of the CD-PRO player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
16.1      Access to the player functions without S&CC unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
16.2      Special test functions of the CD-PRO player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

17        Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
17.1      Microfone kit (part no. 0006953). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
17.2      BGM-Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

18        Steps to solve mechanical problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
18.1      Treating simple errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
18.2      Treating simple errors by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
18.3      Set the mechanism to ‘0’ position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

19        Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                   3
                         Unlocking




                         1           Unpacking - Installation

                         1.1         Unlocking
                                     The key is stored in the coin return cup in the RH bottom
                                     side of the door. The key WUA 1 unlocks the cabinet by tur-
                                     ning the key clockwise. The lock is spring loaded, press
                                     slightly against the door, this allows to turn the key easily.
                                     The two other keys with 5 digit number codes unlock the
                                     cash box inside of the cabinet. In this box also the hand
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                     transmitter is located.


                         1.2         Removal of shipping guards

                                     1.   Remove elastic band from the magazine cabinet.
                                                                                                                                                  WUA1
                                                                                                                                  WU
                                                                                                                                     A1A1
                                                                                                                                   456734
                                                                                                                                     WU           for door
                                     2.   Open the magazine cabinet.

                                     3.   Push the latch bar of one magazine inwards and take it
                                          out.
                                                                                                               for cash box
                                     4.   Remove elastic band and release the wing screw up to
                                          limit stop.

                                     5.   Insert the magazine again and proceed the same way with the second magazine.

                                     6.   Finally remove the CD lens cover.

                                     NOTE: Save the removed shipping guards. You may need them should you decide to move your
                                     machine to another location.


                         1.3         Verification of power voltage
                                     Compare your power voltage with the vol-
                                     tage printed on the label inside of the door. If                                  Made by


                                     your voltage does not match the voltage of
                                     the label do not switch on the jukebox. Con-           amplifier type     Niederdorf 5           D-32351 Stemwede-Levern


                                     tact your dealer to set the voltage according                            Typ  CD-K-99
                                                                                          version number           62792     PN.
                                     to your mains.
                                                                                                              Mod. O M T PRINCESS
                                                                                            serial number          CDV - K99 E
                                     In case of standard UL-versions (for USA) it                             Nr.  43104113  Hz 50
                                     is impossible to adjust another voltage.                                 V    100 - 240  W 270
                                                                                            power voltage
                                     At the other types you can check and modify                                                 Made in Germany
                                     the power setting on the power transformer
                                     of the amplifier. It is described in the accor-
                                     ding chapters ‘amplifier F91’ see page 41
                                     and ‘amplifier K99’ see page 50.

                                     For any service call please have ready your serial and version number.




                               4                                                                              PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Wall mounting




1.4         Wall mounting
            Depending on the installed amplifier the weight
            of the jukebox is 78kg (amplifier K99) to 85kg
            (amplifier F91). Because of this take great pains
            when you mount it on a wall. Use the delivered
            mounting frame (part no. 0051361) and check
            the structural quality of the wall. Calculate a se-                                                                                                                                                                                                         thread for
            curity factor of 2 (170kg) for home use and a                                                                                                                                                                                                               locking bolt
            factor of 4 (340kg) for public use when you se-
            lect your dowels. Use all the dowel holes of the




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            frame. Contact your architect and a dowel ma-
            nufacturer to select suitable mounting devices.
            The manufacturer does not accept liability for
            damages caused of not proper mounted machi-
            nes!

            Fasten the jukebox with the locking bolt which
            you will find in the accessories.
                                                                                              heights approx. 1.10m


1.5         Speaker connection
            To attain a good sound of the jukebox, take
            care when connecting the speakers. Connect                   speaker terminals
            the speakers to either the terminals inside of the           inside                                                                                                                                                            hole for locking bolt
            jukebox or to the terminals on the back side.
            Pay attention of the correct polarity. The red ter-
            minals belong to "+" the black ones to "-".

            The jukebox can be delivered with two different
            amplifiers F91 or K99. You can distinguish both
            types by means of the product label inside the
            door or compare your amplifier with the pictures
            below here.




            Both amplifiers may not be loaded with more
                                                                                    DECKEL ABNEHMEN


            than 4Ω per channel. Less Ohm means more                                REMOVE COVER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Treble
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Tone
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Low Level
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           R
                                                                                                                                                                                                       EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                                                                                        EXTRA INPUT 300mV




                                                                                                                          Verstärker K 99                            0056041                                                                                              4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      L              R                                                        Input CD
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Bass
                                                                  MECHANIK                                                Amplifier K 99 C-UL                                                                                                                                                                                                                              L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     R




                                                                                                                                                                     0058484                                                                                              1




            load! The output of the amplifier K99 to a 4Ω         MECHANISM                                                                                                                                                       P10         off           on                            Clipping
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Remote
                                                                                                                                          MONO                                                                                                                                                                       Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      0039155
                                                                                                                                                                                                            L




                                                                                                                                         STEREO                                                                                                                                                                                                                            R
                                                                                                      CAUTION
                                                                         OPTION

                                                                                    OPTION




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Input Tape
                                                                                                TO REDUCETHE RISK
                                                                                                                           Intern   Extern

            load is 55 Watts rms power at 1 % distortion, to
                                                                                                             CE
                                                                                                OF FIRE REPLA ONL    Y                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     L
                                                                                                WITH SAMETYPE AND        Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass           Treble    BGM
                                                                                                RATING FUSE                                                                                                                       P10
                                                                                                                                                                                                       EINGANG CD




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Remote                  Mode
                                                                                                                                                                                                                R
                                                                      EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER




                                                                                                 SICHERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                                                        INPUT CD




                                                                                                              F1 - F4                                                                                                                         CD                   Tape
                                                                                                 FUSE
                                                                        EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                       L




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Stereo                     2-Kanal                                                                         Mic.-Kit
                                                                                                100-240 V 117 V                                                                                                                                           Input
                                                                            8W / 80 W




                                                                                                50Hz/60Hz 60Hz
                                                                                                                                                                                                       L




            8Ω it is about 28 Watts, to 12Ω it is about 18
                                                                                                                                     ANZEIGE / DISPLAY                                                                                                    Volume
                                                                                                T4A          3,0 AMP                                                                                                                                                             32
                                                                                                                                             MUTE                                                                                                                                16              R                        R
                                                                                                             250 V AC
                                                                                                                                                                                                             MICROPHONE




                                                                                                                                    AVC                                                                                                                                           8
                                                                                                                                                                                                              MIKROFON




                                                                                                             SLOW BLOW                              TAPE                                                                                      R
                                                                                                                                RS232                                                                                                                                             4                                   BGM Level
                                                                         R




                                                                                                                                                                                            RS 232




                                                                                                                                                  BGM                                                                                                                             2
                                                                                                30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=               MICRO
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  BGM                                             1                                                                                        R
                                                                                                 AC   AC   AC   DC                          ok.                                                                              P4                                                  32              L                        L



            Watts.                                                    2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL                                                                                                                                                                                        16                                                                           Line Out
                                                                                                                                    SCHALTER / SWITCHES                                                                                                                           8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              L                                                                                                                            L
                                                                                                                                                                                            INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                                                                                                                                            INFRAROT-REGLER




                                                                      STEREO                                                         1                                                                                                                                            4
                                                                                                                                                                                                         R




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  2
                                                                                                                                                                                                 AUSGANG




                                                                                                                                     2
                                                                                                                                                                                                  OUTPUT




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1
                                                                                                                                     1                                                                                                              off            on
                                                                  INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER                                            2
                                                                  INTERNAL SPEAKER                                         AUS/OFF 3 AVC   EIN/ON
                                                                                                                                                                                                L




                                                                                                                            STEREO 4 MODE 2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                                                CD 5 INPUT TAPE
                                                                                                F1      F2     F3   F4     AUS/OFF 6 BGM   EIN/ON
                                                                                                                                                                                                     BGM




                                                                  CD-TRAFO
                                                                  CD-TRANSFORMER
                                                                                                                                                             ERWEITERUNG



            The output of the amplifier F91 to a 4Ω load is
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Verstärker-Sicherungen / Amplifier Fuses                 240
                                                                                                                                                              EXTENSION                                                                                                                                                                           Netzspannung
                                                                                                                                                                             FERNREGLER                                                                                               210V - 240V               100V - 117V                 230     50/60 Hz
                                                                  BUBBLE-TUBES                                                                                             REMOTE-CONTROL                                                                                                                                                   220
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Si 1/Si 301 Si 102/Si 103 Si 1/Si 301       Si 102/Si 103     210   Mains Voltage
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Si 2/Si 302 Si 100/Si 101 Si 2/Si 302       Si 100/Si 101     117    50/60 cps
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                MT 4A       T 3,15A       T 5A              T 3A            100
                                                                                                 NETZTRAFO



            170Watts rms power, to 8Ω it is about 85 Watts,                                     TRANSFORMER                                                DECKEL ABNEHMEN                                                                                                    Zur Beachtung Nur Sicherungen mit gleicher Größe und
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              gleichem Wert verwenden um Schäden zu vermeiden.
                                                                                                                                                           REMOVE COVER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Caution: To reduce the risk of fire replace only with
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              same type and rating fuses.




            to 12Ω it is about 57 Watts.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Achtung!
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Vor Abnahme der Kappe den Netzstecker



                                                                                                                    K99                                                                                                                                                       ziehen!
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Attention!
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Pull power plug before opening protective
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              lid!
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Leuchtstofflampen/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Flourescent Lamps
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             230V / 117V




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                F91




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        5
                         Power on




                                    If the amplifier is operating in 2-Channel mode, the spea-
                                                                                                                      speaker terminals on
                                    kers at the external terminals are all loaded in parallel to                      the rear side
                                    the left hand channel. If you use 4Ω speakers you must
                                    disconnect one speaker from the terminals before you
                                    switch the jukebox to 2-channel mode.

                                    The right channel (now switched to the sockets “R-Ex-
                                    tern” and “L-Extern”) now may be also loaded with a mini-
                                    mum of 4Ω.

                                    Note that speaker groups like in hi-fi boxes may have, at
                                    certain frequencies, impedances much lower than their
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                    rating.

                                    After having connected all speakers disconnect the moni-
                                    tor speaker inside the jukebox. It is for test purposes only.




                         1.6        Power on
                                    NOTE: Make sure that power outlet is grounded properly.

                                    Insert the power plug. Set the power switch on the L.H.
                                    side of the jukebox to on. The illumination will light. The
                                    selection sledge starts an initialisation run and the coun-
                                    ting of the disc compartments can be watched in the dis-
                                    play. If all compartments are recognized the display
                                    shows "6 1 6 1" for short time. After all the sledge stops in
                                    its home position. The digital display shows the most
                                    played track. If the box is brandnew and the selection me-
                                    mory empty the display shows "0 0 0 0”.

                                                                                                    power
                                                                                                    switch
                                                                                                             o.k. ?




                               6                                                                             PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                 Position of CDs in the magazines




2           Loading compact discs

2.1         Position of CDs in the magazines
            Up to 120 CDs can be inserted in total. The left magazine
            contains all CD's with odd compartment numbers (01, 03,                         CD 101 - 120
                                                                                            for BGM only!
            05 ...), the right one contains all even numbers (02, 04,
            06 ...). But only 100 CDs can be selected in normal ope-
            ration. (CD-no. 01 to CD no. (1)00 ). The CDs number                            10              10
            101 - 120 you can use only for Back Ground Music.




                                                                                                                          OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            You have to update the ‘number of CDs in the magazines’
            in service level 1 button 5 if you insert less than 100 CDs                                     50
                                                                                            50
            (100 CDs = factory pre-setting).


                                                                                      001




                                                                                            CD1        CD2
2.2         Remove magazines
            You can pull out the magazines separately. By pushing
            the latch bar (1) inwards the magazine is released. At the
            same time the CDs are locked into place. Pull the handle
            bar (2) to remove the magazine completely.
                                                                                                            1.
            When you insert the magazine the latch bar clicks into
                                                                                                                     2.
            place and releases the CDs.

            NOTE: In theory it is possible to use only one magazine.
            In this case the empty one has to be removed and the
            jukebox needs to be switched off and on once. After the
            initialisation run all selections belonging to the missing
            magazine are disabled. If e.g. the RH magazine is mis-
            sing, all even selections are disabled. If an even number
            is selected the digital display will flash.

            You can lay the magazine on its back side. Note, that the
            left magazine contains all CDs with odd numbers, the
            right one all with even numbers. Insert the CDs starting
            with the compartment 01, in the LH magazine then insert
            the second CD into compartment 02 which belongs to the
            RH one etc.. The CD label has to face upwards.

            ATTENTION! Always push the magazine into its frame
            until the latch bar clicks into place properly!
                                                                          latch bar
                                                                                                   handle bar




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                   7
                         CD handling precautions - CD and player cleaning




                         2.3         CD handling precautions - CD and player cleaning
                                     Dust, fingerprints or other dirt on the disc surface can
                                     cause skipping, jumping or sticking problems.

                                     Because of this never touch the surface of a disc! Howe-
                                     ver it is rather easy to remove nicotine, dust or finger-
                                     prints.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                     Nicotine, dust, fingerprints:
                                     Dust can be removed with a lintfree soft cloth. If neces-
                                     sary, remove heavy dirt or fingerprints with a moistened
                                     soft cloth soaked in a solution of water and a detergent.
                                     Never use record cleaning sprays or anti static sprays!
                                     Furthermore, do not use other types of cleaners contai-
                                     ning benzene, thinner or other solvents. These liquids will
                                     cause damage to the surface of discs. Move the cloth
                                     from the inside towards the outside and not in circular
                                     motion.

                                     Removing scratches:
                                     Use a soft cloth and a soft polish.

                                     Laser lens cleaning:
                                     Smoke and dust soils the lens. It can be cleaned with a
                                     cue-tip soaked in a detergent (i.e. Kodak Lens Cleaner,
                                     part no. 0051735). Place the tip on the lens and press
                                     down carefully.

                                     ATTENTION! The whole laser unit is very sensitive!
                                     !   Move the cue-tip only in the direction shown in the pic-
                                         ture (perp. to the sledge direction).
                                     !   Do not scratch the special treated surface of the
                                         lense.
                                     !   Take care that the cleaning solution will not run into
                                         the focus unit.
                                     !   Keep away metal parts from the lens unit. A strong magnet is located underneath the lens. It at-
                                         tracts also smallest metal parts and so can block the complete unit.




                               8                                                                              PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                                       Inserting title cards




2.4         Inserting title cards
            After inserting the CD it is recommeded to insert the
            appropriate title card into the paternoster book at the
            same time. Run through the book pages by means of
            the two push buttons.

            To remove the cabinet lid bend both springs to out-
            side.


                                                                                                                         push buttons




                                                                                                                                                               OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            Now you can take out each page.




            Insert the title cards as shown in the picture. After in-
            serting a page turn it forward and backward once to
            check its propper function.




            If the page system works properly the red LED lights
            continuously. A blinking LED indicates the following
            errors:

            1x - LH light gate indicates an error, or is defective

            2x - Lead through gate indicates an error, or is
            defective

            3x - RH light gate indicates an error, or is defective
                                                                                                                     345
                                                                                           345
                                                                                                              F012


                                                                                                                          6
                                                                                                                              78 9 A
                                                                                    F012


                                                                                                6
                                                                                                    78 9 A




                                                                                                                E




                                                                                                                         BC
                                                                                                                     D
                                                                                      E




                                                                                               BC
                                                                                           D




            4x - no or to slow page transport
                                                                                                             red LED
            5x - no zero page identification

            LED blinks continuously: BCD-switch adjustment out of range 0 to 120.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                    9
                         Programming number of CDs in the magazines




                         2.5        Programming number of CDs in the magazines
                                    Level 1, button 5


                                    You have to update the ‘number of CDs in the magazi-
                                    nes’ and make page limitation adjustment if you insert                                                        Selection & Credit
                                    less than 100 CDs (factory pre-setting) or after a                                                                Computer
                                    change of the number of inserted CDs .

                                    If the number of CDs is programmed correctly the dis-
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                    play will flash when you select an empty compartment.
                                    A flashing display indicates an ‘empty’ selection or no
                                    credit.

                                    On the RH wall inside of the jukebox cabinet the so-
                                    called Selection & Credit Computer (SCC unit) is situ-
                                    ated. On it you can find the switch "SERVICE" and the
                                    button "LT".




                                    To program the number of inserted CDs (service
                                                                                                                   SERVICE                                                      button LT
                                    level 1):

                                    1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC-unit to
                                         ON.                                                                                Z    T.T.
                                                                                                                                 +2
                                                                                                                                 +3
                                                                                                                                       F
                                                                                                                                       6
                                                                                                                                       5
                                                                                                                                               7
                                                                                                                                               6
                                                                                                                                               5
                                                                                                                                                        6
                                                                                                                                                        5
                                                                                                                                                        4
                                                                                                                                                                 6
                                                                                                                                                                 5
                                                                                                                                                                 4
                                                                                                                                                                        6
                                                                                                                                                                        5
                                                                                                                                                                        4
                                                                                                                                                                                                   1
                                                                                                                                                                                                   2
                                                                                                                                                                                                   4
                                                                                                          K                      BR    4       4        3        3      3                          5
                                                                                                                           ON          3       3        2        2      2                         T1
                                                                                                                SERVICE                2       2        1        1      1           M             10
                                                                                                                          OFF                                                            LT
                                                                                                                                       0       0        0        0      0                         20  T
                                                                                                                                GP + 6 GP      BS    B4 B3       B2     B1
                                    2.   Press ‘LT’ button.                                                                                                                                       +B




                                    3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press                                                 ACHTUNG:      MEMORY - Stecker von OFF
                                                                                                                                                      auf ON umstecken, wenn
                                                                                                                                                      Top tunes, Popularitätszähler
                                                                                                                                                      oder Kassenzähler arbeiten soll.
                                                                                                                                                                                               P6 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                  6

                                                                                                                                                                                               P5 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                  5

                                         selection button 0 then release both buttons.                  CD TOWER                        ATTENTION: Move MEMORY Plug from OFF
                                                                                                                                                      to ON if Top tunes, Pop Meter or

                                                                                                        Selection &                                   Cash Box Content Registration
                                                                                                                                                      is required.                                1
                                                                                                                                                                                               P8 8
                                                                                                      Credit Computer                   ATTENTION: Placer la prise MEMORY en
                                                                                                                                                      position ON, de la position OFF
                                                                                                                                                      si le Top Tunes, le compteur de
                                                                                                                                                      popularité et la contenu de la
                                                                                                              CDM 12                                                                             ON
                                    4.   Press selection button 1. Service level 1 is rea-                                                            caisse sont demandés.
                                                                                                                                                                                              Memory
                                                                                                                                                                                                 OFF

                                         ched. Display is: 1_ _ _.                                                                                                         0045411




                                    5.   To check the current setting press button 5, the display shows e.g. 50 or 00.

                                    6.   To reprogram press selection button 5 -hold down- and press selection button R. Enter the desi-
                                         red number of CDs with two digits (enter 00 for 100 CDs).

                                    " To check the new settings, press button 5 again.

                                    Exit the service program:

                                    1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to OFF.

                                    2.   Press ‘LT’ button.


                                    " The changer starts an initialisation run. After this the jukebox is ready to operate.


                               10                                                                                         PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                Adjustment of the page limitation




2.6           Adjustment of the page limitation
              If les than 100 CDs are installed it is useful to disable the
              not needed pages. It will be done by two BCD switches at
              the front side of the book.

              For easy handling you can use the table below to adjust
              the two switches.


                                                                                                                                         345
                                                                                                                345




                                                                                                                                  F012


                                                                                                                                              6
                                                                                                                                                  78 9 A
                                                                                                         F012


                                                                                                                     6
                                                                                                                         78 9 A




                                                                                                                                    E
                                                                                                                                             BC
                                                                                                                                         D




                                                                                                           E
                                                                                                                    BC
                                                                                                                D




              Nevertheless you will find here an example how to calcu-




                                                                                                                                                                                      OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
              late the BCD switch adjustment.

              The switch BCD1 has a valency of 16, the other one,
              BCD2 a valency of 1. The meaning of the characters is                    345                                                                          345




                                                                                               6




                                                                                                                                                                            6
                                                                                F012




                                                                                                                                                             F012
              according to the hexadecimal character set:




                                                                                                78 9 A




                                                                                                                                                                             78 9 A
              A = 10         B = 11         C = 12




                                                                                    E




                                                                                                                                                                  E
                                                                                           BC                                                                           BC
                                                                                       D                                                                            D
              D = 13         E = 14         F = 15.                                 BCD1                                                                            BCD2
              If you want to adust a number of 60 CDs divide 60 by 16.
              It equals 3,75. The number before the decimal point has to be adjusted at BCD1. Ignore the num-
              bers after the decimal point. After this multiply the adjusted number 3 by 16. It equals 48. Subtract
              this number from the given number 60. This equals 12. Adjust this number at BCD2 as „C“ (=12) ac-
              cording to the hexadecimal character set.

       Pages BCD1 BCD2           Pages BCD1 BCD2      Pages BCD1 BCD2         Pages BCD1 BCD2                                                              Pages BCD1 BCD2
         1        0     1         26    1       A       51     3      3        76          4       C                                                       101          6         5
         2        0     2         27    1       B       52     3      4        77          4       D                                                       102          6         6
         3        0     3         28    1       C       53     3      5        78          4       E                                                       103          6         7
         4        0     4         29    1       D       54     3      6        79          4       F                                                       104          6         8
         5        0     5         30    1       E       55     3      7        80          5       0                                                       105          6         9
         6        0     6         31    1       F       56     3      8        81          5       1                                                       106          6        A
         7        0     7         32    2       0       57     3      9        82          5       2                                                       107          6        B
         8        0     8         33    2       1       58     3      A        83          5       3                                                       108          6        C
         9        0     9         34    2       2       59     3      B        84          5       4                                                       109          6        D
        10        0     A         35    2       3       60     3      C        85          5       5                                                       110          6        E
         11       0     B         36    2       4       61     3      D        86          5       6                                                        111         6         F
        12        0     C         37    2       5       62     3      E        87          5       7                                                       112          7         0
        13        0     D         38    2       6       63     3      F        88          5       8                                                       113          7         1
        14        0     E         39    2       7       64     4      0        89          5       9                                                       114          7         2
        15        0     F         40    2       8       65     4      1        90          5       A                                                       115          7         3
        16        1     0         41    2       9       66     4      2        91          5       B                                                       116          7         4
        17        1     1         42    2       A       67     4      3        92          5       C                                                       117          7         5
        18        1     2         43    2       B       68     4      4        93          5       D                                                       118          7         6
        19        1     3         44    2       C       69     4      5        94          5       E                                                       119          7         7
        20        1     4         45    2       D       70     4      6        95          5       F                                                       120          7         8
        21        1     5         46    2       E       71     4      7        96          6       0
        22        1     6         47    2       F       72     4      8        97          6       1
        23        1     7         48    3       0       73     4      9        98          6       2
        24        1     8         49    3       1       74     4      A        99          6       3
        25        1     9         50    3       2       75     4      B       100          6       4




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                              11
                         Coin operation




                         3           Coin operation or free play?
                                     Both coin operation or free play are adjustable at the “Selection & Credit Computer”-unit. It is located
                                     at the RH side of the cabinet. Special jumpers (short wires, located in the accessory pack of the ma-
                                     nual ) are used to set prices on the SCC-unit. As long as no jumper is set in row GP from 0 to F and
                                     the jumper in row GP+6 is not removed (free play) the jukebox works with coins only.


                         3.1         Coin operation
                                     From factory the jukebox is set to coin operation. If you in-                                   denomination
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                     sert a certain number of coins according the denomina-                                             label
                                     tion label, the jukebox gives the credits or plays it is
                                     adjusted for. If you want to change the play prices you
                                     have to change the jumper settings on the SCC-unit.                                                       PRICE OF SELECTIONS
                                                                                                                                                   1
                                                                                                                                                   3
                                                                                                                                                       play for 50 cts
                                                                                                                                                       plays for $ 1
                                                                                                                                                  18 plays for $ 5
                                                                                                                                               Select 9999 for   Top Ten




                         3.2         Free play                                                           jumper from 0 to F
                                                                                                         in row GP
                                     To set the jukebox to free play:

                                     1.   Remove all the jumpers on the SCC unit taking note          T.T.  F     7       6    6    6
                                          of current setting for future reference.                    +2    6     6       5    5    5
                                                                                                      +3    5     5       4    4    4
                                                                                                      BR    4     4       3    3    3
                                                                                                            3     3       2    2    2
                                     2.   Set a jumper from 0 to F (free play) in the row GP on             2     2       1    1    1      M
                                                                                                            0     0       0    0    0                            LT
                                          the S&CC unit.
                                                                                                     GP + 6 GP    BS   B4 B3   B2   B1

                                     3.   Press ‘LT’ button.

                                                                                                             jumper from 0 to 7
                                     4.   Now one track is selectable without coin insertion.
                                                                                                             in row BS                   button LT

                                     5.   From two to six tracks are selectable by setting an
                                          additionally jumper in the row ‘BS’ (Bonus Step) from
                                          0 to 2 up to 0 to 6.

                                     6.   Up to 47 tracks are pre-selectable by setting a jumper in this row ‘BS from 0 to 7.




                               12                                                                                      PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                          Test credit




3.3         Test credit
            For repair and test purposes it is possible to give test credits. By touching the test credit button (in
            special cases several times) you get one credit also shown in the digital display. You can terminate
            unused credits by pressing the LT button.

            In jukeboxes with an electronic coin validator you can find
            the test credit button on the coin validator interface board.




                                                                                                                        OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            In jukeboxes with mechanical coin validator the test credit
            button is mounted above the return lever inside.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                             13
                         How to select a track




                         4            Track selections

                         4.1          How to select a track
                                      If credit exists or free play is set you can select tracks
                                      by means of the buttons 0 - 9 of the keyboard.
                                                                                                                                         PRICE OF SELECTIONS
                                                                                                                                             1 play for 50 cts
                                                                                                                                             3 plays for $ 1
                                                                                                                                            18 plays for $ 5
                                                                                                                                         Select 9999 for   Top Ten




                                      First enter the number of the CD with two digits, then
                                      the track number with two digits too.(track numbers
                                      higher than 35 will not be accepted).                                   R
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                      Example: CD 2, track 9: Enter 0 - 2 - 0 - 9.

                                      (Exception: CD 100 = 00.)                                    button R


                                      The button R
                                      You can delete wrong entered numbers up to the third
                                      digit by means of the button R (Reset). But after ha-
                                      ving entered the fourth digit the jukebox stores and executes a selection also made by mistake. By
                                      pressing the button R the available credit will be displayed for a few seconds.


                                      The display flashes
                                      After entering the fourth digit of a selection the jukebox starts to search
                                      and play the selected CD immediately. If the display flashes the entered
                                      selection was not valid. Check:

                                      !   if credit is available
                                      !   if the selection is higher than the programmed number of CDs in magazines


                                      If you select a higher track number as available on a CD, the jukebox overcounts the tracks and
                                      starts at the beginning.

                                      Example:
                                      CD 03 contains 17 tracks. But selected track is 0 - 3 - 1 - 9. The jukebox plays track 02 of CD 03.

                                      Maximum 35 tracks per CD can be selected!




                               14                                                                                   PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                 I do not like this track - the button CANCEL




4.2         I do not like this track - the button CANCEL
            If you do not like a track you can either
            cancel it by pressing the button 'CAN-
            CEL' at the control box inside the jukebox
            or at the infrared remote control. The
            jukebox stops playing or plays the next                                                                                                                                                                                                                            -

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            MODE

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            CANCEL
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   VOLUME
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   BASS
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   TREBLE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   BALANCE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         +

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      PRESET

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      MUTE




            track if a selection has already been
            made.

            You can terminate all selections only by




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            pressing the button LT on the SCC unit .



            You can loosen the control box inside the                                                                                                                                   VOLUME
            jukebox to use it as an external wire re-                                                                                                                                   BASS
                                                                                                                                                                                        TREBLE

            mote control. Its 10-line ribbon cable may                                                                                                                                -
                                                                                                                                                                                        BALANCE
                                                                                                                                                                                               +
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  RCS


            be extended as required with any kind of                                                                                   MODE                                                                                                                   PRESET                                                                      SELECTION

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               ART.NR.:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              0040443



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2

            wire .
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      3

                                                                                                                         CANCEL                                                                                                                                     MUTE                                                              4               5            6          RESET

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      7               8           9

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  0



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      MUSIC
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  -               +
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  +/- VOLUME
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       MODE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              MODE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           PRESET
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  +/- BASS




            As an option it is possible to connect two                                          button CANCEL F91
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      MODE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          CANCEL                               +/- TREBLE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          MUTE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    MODE

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               +/- BALANCE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   MODE




            wired remote controls in parallel or one
            wired remote control together with one in-
            frared remote control.



                                                                                             DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                             REMOVE COVER
                                                                                                                                                                                                            EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                                                                                             EXTRA INPUT 300mV




                                                                                                                                                                           0056041
                                                                                                                                    Verstärker K 99
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          R




                                                                              MECHANIK
                                                                                                                                    Amplifier K 99 C-UL                    0058484

                                                                              MECHANISM                                                           MONO
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 L




                                                                                                                                              STEREO
                                                                                                                                                                                                            EE




                                                                                                               CAUTION
                                                                                                          TO REDUCE THE RISK
                                                                                              OPTION




                                                                                                                                              Extern
                                                                                    OPTION




                                                                                                                                    Intern
                                                                                                          OF FIRE REPLACE ONLY                                    Treble     BGM
                                                                                                          WITH SAME TYPE AND       Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass
                                                                                                                                                                                                               EINGANG CD

                                                                                                                                                                                                                         R
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 INPUT CD




                                                                                                          RATING FUSE
                                                                                                            SICHERUNG
                                                                                  EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER




                                                                                                                         F1 - F4
                                                                                                             FUSE
                                                                                     EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                                    L




                                                                                                                                                                                                                L




                                                                                                           100-240 V 117 V
                                                                                         8W / 80 W




                                                                                                           50Hz/60Hz 60Hz                   ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       MICROPHONE




                                                                                                          T4A         3,0 AMP                      MUTE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                        MIKROFON




                                                                                                                      250 V AC               AVC           TAPE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       RS 232




                                                                                                                      SLOW BLOW           RS232
                                                                                                                                            MICRO          BGM
                                                                                     R




                                                                                                           30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=
                                                                                                                 AC   AC   DC                        ok.
                                                                                                            AC
                                                                                                                                           SCHALTER / SWITCHES
                                                                                                                                                                                                       INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                                                                                                                                                       INFRAROT-REGLER




                                                                                    2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL
                                                                                                                                                                                                                    R




                                                                                                                                              1
                                                                                                                                                                                                            AUSGANG
                                                                                                                                                                                                             OUTPUT




                                                                                    STEREO                                                    2
                                                                                                                                              1
                                                                                                                                               2
                                                                                                                                                                                                           L




                                                                                INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER                                  AUS/OFF 3 AVC   EIN/ON
                                                                                INTERNAL SPEAKER                                        STEREO 4 MODE 2-KANAL/2C
                                                                                                                                                                 HANNEL

                                                                                                                                            CD 5 INPUT TAPE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  BGM




                                                                                                               F1   F2   F3    F4      AUS/OFF 6 BGM   EIN/ON
                                                                                 CD-TRAFO                                                                             EEWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                       R
                                                                                 CD-TRANSFORMER                                                                            XTENSION     FERNREGLER
                                                                                                                                                                                      REMOTE-CONTROL
                                                                                 BUBBLE-TUBES


                                                                                                                NETZTRAFO                                           DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                                               TRANSFORMER                                          REMOVE COVER




                                                                                             Achtung!                   Netzstecker
                                                                                                                                                                                       240 Netzspannung
                                                                                              Vor Abnahme der Kappe den                                                                230  50/60 Hz
                                                                                              ziehen!                                                                                  220                                                       0058407
                                                                                              Warning!                                                                                 210 Mains Voltage
                                                                                              Shock hazard!         Do not open!                                                             50/60 cps
                                                                                                                                                                                       117                                                                      INTERN
                                                                                                                                                                                        100
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                CHANNEL 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Verstärker
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Amplifier




                                                                                                                                                                          mit
                                                                                                                                           Zur Beachtung: Nur Sicherungen
                                                                                                                                                                       Wert                                                                                   MAX
                                                                                           Netzsicherung                                   gleicher Größe und gleichem                                                                           MIN
                                                                                                                                                                      vermeiden.
                                                                                           Mains Fuse                                      verwenden, um Schäden zu
                                                                                  Schein-
                                                                                                     - T 4A
                                                                                  annehmer 210-240V                                        Caution: To reduce the risk
                                                                                                                                                                       of fire
                                                                                  Bill-    100-117V - F 6A                                 replace only with same typ
                                                                                                                                                                       and rating fuses.

                                                                                  acceptor                                                                                                                                                                      CANCEL
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       MUTE
                                                                                                                                         Externer Hauptschalter
                                                                                                                                         External Mains switch
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               EXTERN
                                                                                                                                         Leuchtstofflampen                                                                                                     CHANNEL 2
                                                                                                                                         Fluorescent Lamps
                                                                                                                                           230V / 117V
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 MIN          MAX




                                                           0058407

                                                                          INTERN
                                                                          CHANNEL 1

                                                           MIN          MAX                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                RCS-
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               K
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              No.: 00
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  SELE                                                       5974
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      CTIO                                                        5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          N
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      3         OPTIO
                                                                 MUTE     CANCEL                                                                                                                                                                                                                              4                                                               N
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              RESE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          T
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          7
                                                                         EXTERN                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              9
                                                                         CHANNEL 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      0

                                                           MIN          MAX
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      VOLU
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          ME                                      POWE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              R
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      -
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  +
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                INTE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  -                           CHAN RN
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +                        NEL 1

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               CANC                        EXTE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   EL MU                  CHAN RN

                                                         button CANCEL K99                                                                                                                                                                                                                              TE                    NEL 2




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            15
                         Albumplay - playing a whole CD




                         4.3         Albumplay - playing a whole CD
                                     You can select a whole CD by entering the CD number followed by two times 0, provided that 'Al-
                                     bumplay' is enabled and the SCC has reached the fourth bonus level or if free play is set.


                                     Programme:
                                     To enable 'Albumplay', enter the service level 1:

                                     1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to ON.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                     2.   Press ‘LT’ button.

                                     3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 then release both buttons.

                                     4.   Press selection button 1. Service level 1 is reached. Display is: 1_ _ _.


                                     To enable 'Albumplay' press selection button 9 -hold down- and press selection button R. Release
                                     both buttons. Enter 01 to enable (or 00 to disable) 'Albumplay'.

                                     ATTENTION! If you press the CANCEL button while a complete CD is playing as long as the last
                                     track is not reached the next track on this CD will be played.


                                     Exit the service program:

                                     1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to OFF.

                                     2.   Press ‘LT’ button.

                                     " The changer starts an initialisation run. After this the jukebox is ready to operate.




                               16                                                                                 PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                Albumplay - playing a whole CD




5           Automatic random select
            If the playstimulator is switched on by means of the conti-
            nuous play switch or the service program the jukebox
            plays random tracks of the registered CDs in the magazi-
            nes (service program level 1 button 5). CDs declared as                                          RCS-K

                                                                                                      No.: 0059745

            BGM CDs will not be used, refer to chapt. 9.4 on page 31!               SELECTION

                                                                                     1     2      3      OPTION                                                                                                                            button to
                                                                                     4     5      6       RESET                                                                                                                            switch
                                                                                     7     8      9                                                                                                                                        continuous
            The volume is the same as in normal operation. If a se-                        0                                                                                                                                               play
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           on and off




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            lection is made the playstimulator will be interrupted im-                                   POWER

                                                                                     VOLUME
            mediately and remains after having played the selected                   -     +
                                                                                                   INTERN
                                                                                                  CHANNEL 1
            tracks.                                                                  -     +
                                                                                                   EXTERN
                                                                                                  CHANNEL 2
                                                                                   CANCEL MUTE




            You can programme the playstimulator by software too.
            Then the time between the random tracks of the playsti-
            mulator is programmable between 1 up to 98 min. You
            may also programme a time window in which the playsti-
            mulator works, refer to chapt. 9.3 on page 29.



            On jukeboxes with F91 amplifier or without remote con-
            trols you can switch on CONTINUOUS PLAY with the
            continuous play switch. Part number is 0034410. It has




                                                                                                                                         Credit Computer
                                                                                                                                           Selection &
                                                                                                                                                                                                     CD TOWER
            to be connected to P8 of the SCC unit.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            K
                                                                                                                        CDM 12




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  SERVICE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             OFF
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              ON



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Z
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     GP + 6 GP



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      BR
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      +3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      +2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      T.T.
                                                                                                                                                ATTENTION:



                                                                                                                                                                                                ATTENTION: Move MEMORY Plug from OFF



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               ACHTUNG:




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            F
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     7
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     BS
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     B4
                                                                                                                        caisse sont demandés.
                                                                                                                        popularité et la contenu de la
                                                                                                                        si le Top Tunes, le compteur de
                                                                                                                        position ON, de la position OFF
                                                                                                                        Placer la prise MEMORY en

                                                                                                                                                             is required.
                                                                                                                                                             Cash Box Content Registration
                                                                                                                                                             to ON if Top tunes, Pop Meter or


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        oder Kassenzähler arbeiten soll.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Top tunes, Popularitätszähler
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        auf ON umstecken, wenn
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        MEMORY - Stecker von OFF




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     B3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     B2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     B1
                                                                                                          0045411




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              M
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             LT
                                                                                                                    Memory



                                                                                                                                                        P8 8



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       P5 1

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         P6 1
                                                                                                                       OFF

                                                                                                                       ON


                                                                                                                                                             1



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          5

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            6




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    +B



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          T1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          20
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          10
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         T


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                off
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           on


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Continuous




                                                                          continuous play
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Play




                                                                          switch




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      17
                         Volume, sound and balance control - amplifier F91




                         6           Volume, sound and balance control

                         6.1         Volume, sound and balance control - amplifier F91
                                     With the control terminal inside of the jukebox the volume, treble, bass and balance can be cont-
                                     rolled individually.

                                     After power up or if no button has been pressed for approx. 5 sec or after the button PRESET has
                                     been pressed, the terminal stays in the mode "VOLUME". The LED "VOLUME" lights. In this mode
                                     you can control the volume by means of the buttons '+' and '-'. (Adjustments return to preset after po-
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                     wer off.)

                                     One LED corresponds to each mode. Use ‘mode’ button to activate desired mode. With the buttons
                                     '+' and '-' treble, bass or balance can be controlled.

                                     The control terminal can be taken out and be used as a wired remote control.

                                     ATTENTION! Depending on the adjusted volume of the jukebox loudness levels of more than 70 dB
                                     can be reached.


                                     The meanings of the buttons...
                                     !   VOLUME:
                                         ! Volume LED lights.
                                         ! + button increases volume
                                         ! - button decreases volume.
                                                                                                   current                    VOLUME
                                     !   BASS: (Press ‘MODE’ button once.)                         mode                      BASS
                                         ! Bass LED lights.                                                                 TREBLE
                                                                                                                           BALANCE
                                         ! + button increases bass volume
                                                                                                                   -              +
                                         ! - button decreases bass volume.
                                                                                                               MODE          PRESET
                                     !   TREBLE: (Press ‘MODE’ button twice.)                                CANCEL        MUTE
                                         ! Treble LED lights.
                                                                                                                 0039661
                                         ! + button increases treble volume
                                         ! - button decreases treble volume.

                                     !   BALANCE: (Press ‘MODE’ button 3 times.)
                                         ! Balance LED lights.
                                         ! + button increases right hand channel volume
                                           and decreases left hand channel volume
                                         ! - button decreases right hand channel volume
                                           and increases left hand channel volume.

                                                                                                             +/- VOLUME           LED Volume lights
                                     MODE: Switches to the next operating mode. After                 Press MODE button once
                                     about 5 seconds without operating any buttons, ‘vo-
                                     lume’ mode is resumed.                                                  +/- BASS             LED Bass lights

                                                                                                      Press MODE button once
                                     PRESET: Volume, bass, treble, and balance are set to
                                     the preset according to DIP switch setting. Actual                      +/- TREBLE           LED Treble lights
                                     mode is set to ‘Volume’.                                         Press MODE button once

                                                                                                             +/- BALANCE          LED Balance lights
                                     CANCEL: Rejects a playing track. If album play is se-
                                     lected the next track will be played.                            Press MODE button once


                                     MUTE: As long as this button is activated, the amplifier output is muted.




                               18                                                                                  PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                       Volume, sound and balance control - amplifier F91




            ATTENTION! After power off all adjustments are reset to dip switch settings. For permanent adjust-
            ment e.g. treble, bass use the dip switches.


            The control terminal inside of the jukebox can be taken out and be used as a wired remote control. If
            required its 10-line ribbon cable may be extended with any kind of wire. The voltage of the control
            wire is 5V DC.

            It is possible to connect two wired remote controls in parallel or one wired remote control together
            with one infrared remote control The control mode is displayed with 4 LEDs. The mode can be chan-
            ged by using the ‘mode’ button to control volume, bass, treble and balance:




                                                                                                                                                         OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            The infrared remote control
            As desired an infrared remote control will be installed from fac-
            tory or can be delivered as conversion kit (part no. 40435). If it
            has been installed the hand transmitter is located in the cash-
                                                                                                                                             RCS

            box.                                                                                                               ART.NR.: 0040443


                                                                                                               SELECTION

                                                                                                               1           2       3



            If credit is given or free play is programmed a CD can be selec-             selection             4           5       6       RESET




            ted with the buttons 0 to 9 and R.                                           buttons               7        8          9


                                                                                                                           0



                                                                                                                   MUSIC


            Double button functions as required in the service programs (i.e.            music
                                                                                                                -          +           +/- VOLUME
                                                                                                                                           MODE

                                                                                                                                       +/- BASS
                                                                                                              MODE     PRESET


            press button 5 -hold down- and press button R), are impossible.              control              CANCEL   MUTE
                                                                                                                                           MODE

                                                                                                                                       +/- TREBLE
                                                                                                                                           MODE


            For this you only can use the keyboard of the jukebox.                       buttons                                       +/- BALANCE
                                                                                                                                           MODE




            The meanings of the music control buttons are according to the
            buttons on the control terminal on the rear side of the jukebox
            (ref. to the prev. section).

            The receiver eye of the infrared remote control is located behind
            the plastic on the top RH front side of the door. Beam this point
            directly if possible.
                                                                                  battery type
                                                                                  LR03 (AAA)
            Batteries are included. Necessary are 4 micro cells type LR03                                 BATTERY:


            (AAA). To open the battery compartment move the cover like                                    IEC LR03
                                                                                                          (AAA)


                                                                                                                                       +
            shown in the picture. Needed battery type and position of the                             +
            batteries in the hand transmitter are shown on the casing. Part                                                                          +
            no. of the hand transmitter: 0040443.
                                                                                                          +




                                                                                  position of
                                                                                  the batteries




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                 19
                         Volume, sound and balance control - amplifier K99




                         6.2         Volume, sound and balance control - amplifier K99
                                     Volume control
                                                                                                           DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                     You can control the volume of the juke-                               REMOVE COVER


                                     box from different points at the same




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                                 Verstärker K 99




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 EXTRA INPUT 300mV
                                                                                           MECHANIK                                              Amplifier K 99 C-UL




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              R
                                                                                           MECHANISM
                                     time:                                                                                                                        MONO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     L
                                                                                                                                                                STEREO
                                                                                                                             CAUTION




                                                                                                 OPTION

                                                                                                           OPTION
                                                                                                                       TO REDUCETHE RISK
                                                                                                                       OF FIRE REPLA ONL
                                                                                                                                    CE      Y    Intern    Extern
                                     !   With the pots Vol.1 and Vol.2 on the                                          WITH SAMETYPE AND
                                                                                                                       RATING FUSE
                                                                                                                                                Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass              Treble   BGM




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                EINGANG CD

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         R
                                                                                                                        SICHERUNG




                                                                                              EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 INPUT CD
                                                                                                                                     F1 - F4
                                         amplifier.                                                                     FUSE




                                                                                                EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                                               L
                                                                                                                       100-240V 117 V




                                                                                                    8W / 80 W
                                                                                                                       50Hz/60Hz 60Hz




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                L
                                                                                                                                                            ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                                                       T4A         3,0 AMP                             MUTE
                                     !   With the IR remote control.                                                               250 V AC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      MICROPHONE
                                                                                                                                                           AVC                TAPE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       MIKROFON
                                                                                                                                   SLOW BLOW
                                                                                                                                                       RS232




                                                                                                 R




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      RS 232
                                                                                                                       30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=               MICRO             BGM
                                                                                                                        AC   AC   AC   DC                       ok.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                     !   With the pots of the control box at the               2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL                                      SCHALTER / SWITCHES
                                                                                                                                                    AUTO 1 MUTE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                                               STEREO                                                                  AUS/OFF




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      INFRAROT-REGLER



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   R
                                                                                                                                                  NORMAL 2 RS232       SERVICE

                                         rear side of the jukebox.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                           AUSGANG
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            OUTPUT
                                                                                                                                                 SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL
                                                                                           INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER                                     HIGH   2   AVC    LOW
                                                                                           INTERNAL SPEAKER                                       AUS/OFF   3   AVC    EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                          L
                                                                                                                                                   STEREO   4   MODE   2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                                                                       CD   5
                                                                                                                                                            INPUT      TAPE
                                                                                                                       F1     F2     F3   F4      AUS/OFF 6 BGM        EIN/ON
                                                                                           CD-TRAFO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                               BGM
                                                                                           CD-TRANSFORMER
                                                                                                                                                                                       ERWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                                        EXTENSION
                                     The device from which the volume is                   BUBBLE-TUBES
                                                                                                                                                                                                       FERNREGLER
                                                                                                                                                                                                     REMOTE-CONTROL


                                     changed determines it.                                                             NETZTRAFO
                                                                                                                       TRANSFORMER                                                   DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                                                                                                                     REMOVE COVER

                                     The volume control unit can be taken out
                                     and may be mounted at another place as
                                     a remote control. Its cable may be exten-
                                     ded as required with any kind of wire. The voltages of the control wires are 5V DC.

                                     The control box has two volume knobs (Intern / Channel 1 and Extern / Channel 2). In position ”Ste-
                                     reo” the knob “Intern / Channel 1” is effective for the internal speakers. The knob Extern / Channel 2
                                     is controlling the volume of the RCA outputs for an optional external amplifier. In DIP switch position
                                     ”2 Channel” the channels1 (RH) and 2 (LH) are controlled separately.

                                     ATTENTION! The pots Vol. 1 and Vol. 2 on the amplifier are not effective if the wire control
                                     box is connected.


                                     Treble and bass control
                                     You can control the sound with the knobs bass and treble on the amplifier.

                                     Automatic volume control
                                     The AVC sets CDs with different volume levels to an equal level. The level of CDs with a high level
                                     will be reduced; the level of low-levelled CDs will be increased. This control works rather slow to
                                     save the dynamic range of the track. You can enable the correction with the DIP switch “AVC” (the
                                     3rd DIP swich of the 6 sw. group). Default is AVC disabled.
                                     With the second DIP switch of the 6 sw. group you can reduce the intensity of volume correction.




                               20                                                                                                                       PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                       Volume, sound and balance control - amplifier K99




            The infrared remote control
            An infrared remote control is installed from factory in
            every Princess. It can also be delivered as conversion kit
            (part no. 0058809). If it has been installed the hand trans-
            mitter is located in the cash box.
                                                                                                         RCS-K

                                                                                                    No.: 0059745

            If credit is given or free play is programmed a CD can be          SELECTION


            selected with the buttons 0 to 9 and R.                             1      2        3      OPTION



                                                                                4     5         6       RESET
                                                                                                                       selection buttons
            Double button functions as required in the service pro-             7     8         9


            grams (i.e. press button 5 -hold down- and press button                   0




                                                                                                                                           OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            R), are impossible. For this you only can use the key-                                     POWER

                                                                                VOLUME

            board of the jukebox.                                               -       +
                                                                                                 INTERN
                                                                                                CHANNEL 1
                                                                                -      +
                                                                                                 EXTERN

            You can control the volume by means of the buttons +              CANCEL MUTE
                                                                                                CHANNEL 2



            and -. In stereo mode the internal +/- buttons control the
            volume of the internal speakers. The external +/- buttons
            control the volume of the K99 RCA jacks for an optional                                           music control buttons
            external amplifier. In 2-channel mode you can control the
            external speakers by the buttons + and - of the external
            channel.                                                                                                   battery type
                                                                                                                       LR03 (AAA)
            Beam the jukebox directly if possible.
                                                                                     BATTERY:
                                                                                     IEC LR03

            You can connect the wire remote control box as well.                     (AAA)


                                                                                                           +
                                                                               +
            The power-on volume level is always set by the channel 1                                               +
            and 2 pots on the amplifier or on the control box (if con-
            nected).                                                                +
                                                                                                                       position of
            Batteries will be delivered. Necessary are 4 micro cells                                                   the batteries
            type LR03 (AAA).

            To open the battery compartment move the cover like
            shown in the picture.

            Needed battery type and position of the batteries in the
            hand transmitter are shown on the casing.

            Part no. of the hand transmitter: 0059745.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                 21
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 3




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                50ct




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          T.T.  F    7    6    6    6    6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  2 plays 1 $
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             5 plays 2 $
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +2    6    6    5    5    5    5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         2$




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +3    5    5    4    4    4    4              4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          AUS


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                20ct




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          BR    4    4    3    3    3    3              5
                                                                                                                                                                     T.T.  F                 7                  6           6    6                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     T1
                                                                                                                                                               Z                                                                                                                               1                                                                                                                                                                                3    3    2    2    2    2             10
                                                                                                                                                                     +2    6                 6                  5           5    5                                                             2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2    2    1    1    1    1    M
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         1$



                                                                                                                                                                     +3    5                 5                  4           4    4                                                             4                                                                                                                                                                                                                       20
                                                                                                                                                                     BR    4                 4                  3           3    3                                                             5                                                                                                                                                                                0    0    0    0    0    0        LT    T
                                                                                                                               K
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                10ct




                                                                                                                                                              ON           3                 3                  2           2    2                                                            T1                                                                                                                                                                                                                       +B
                                                                                                                                                SERVICE                    2                 2                  1           1    1          M                                                 10                                                                                                                                                                         GP + 6 GP   BS   B4   B3   B2   B1
                                                                                                                                                             OFF                                                                                                  LT
                                                                                                                                                                           0                 0                  0           0    0                                                            20  T
                                                                                                                                                                    GP + 6 GP                BS         B4      B3          B2   B1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              +B
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                50ct
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          T.T.  F    7    6    6    6    6
                                                                                                                                                                                 ACHTUNG:                                                                                                P6 1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             3 plays 2 $
                                                                                                                                                                                                          MEMORY - Stecker von OFF
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1 play 1 $
                                                                                                                                                                                                          auf ON umstecken, wenn                                                            6                                                                                                                                                                             +2    6    6    5    5    5    5




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         2$
                                                                                                                                                                                                          Top tunes, Popularitätszähler                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                          oder Kassenzähler arbeiten soll.                                               P5 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            5                                                                                                                                                                             +3    5    5    4    4    4    4              4
                                                                                                                             CD TOWER                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     AUS


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                20ct
                                                                                                                                                                                 ATTENTION:               Move MEMORY Plug from OFF                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       BR    4    4    3    3    3    3              5
                                                                                                                                                                                                          to ON if Top tunes, Pop Meter or                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             T1
                                                                                                                        Selection &                                                                       Cash Box Content Registration
                                                                                                                                                                                                          is required.                                                                        1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         1    M
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       10




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         1$
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         P8 8                                                                                                                                                                                                                          20
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  LT
                                                                                                                      Credit Computer                                            ATTENTION:               Placer la prise MEMORY en
                                                                                                                                                                                                          position ON, de la position OFF                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       0    0    0    0    0    0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        T




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                10ct
                                                                                                                                                                                                          si le Top Tunes, le compteur de                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              +B
                                                                                                                                    CDM 12
                                                                                                                                                                                                          popularité et la contenu de la
                                                                                                                                                                                                          caisse sont demandés.                                                  ON                                                                                                                                                                                      GP + 6 GP   BS   B4   B3   B2   B1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Memory
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 OFF
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  0045411




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       21 plays $ 5.00
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            3 plays $ 1.00
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1 play 50 cts
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          T.T.  F    7    6    6    6    6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                $ 1.00
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +2    6    6    5    5    5    5              2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +3    5    5    4    4    4    4              4




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         $ 1.00
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          USA
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Press „LT“ button once (4) to accept the new price/bo-
                                                                                                                                                               rate attached instruction by connecting to the pin row (2)
                                                            nomination label. In the “Unipack“ version no play prices are




                                                                                                                                                               Coin output plugs (1) should be set according an sepa-

                                                                                                                                                               on the SCC unit. Pay attention to wiring colors (refer to


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Set the attached jumpers in B1 to B4 according to the
                                                            Usually the prices are preset by the factory according the de-




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          BR    4    4    3    3    3    3              5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       T1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                3    3    2    2    2    2             10




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                25cts
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2    2    1    1    1    1    M        20
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                0    0    0    0    0    0        LT    T
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       +B
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         GP + 6 GP   BS   B4   B3   B2   B1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      number of the desired additional bonus plays. (3).
                                                            preset. To set the play prices do the following steps:




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       18 plays $ 5.00
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            3 plays $ 1.00
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1 play 50 cts
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          T.T.  F    7    6    6    6    6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                $ 1.00
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +2    6    6    5    5    5    5              2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +3    5    5    4    4    4    4              4




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         $ 1.00
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          USA
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          BR    4    4    3    3    3    3              5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       T1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                3    3    2    2    2    2             10




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                25cts
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2    2    1    1    1    1    M        20
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                0    0    0    0    0    0        LT    T
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       +B
                 Coin and price settings




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         GP + 6 GP   BS   B4   B3   B2   B1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          T.T.  F    7    6    6    6    6




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2 plays 50 p
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1 play 30 p


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        5 plays £ 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +2    6    6    5    5    5    5




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                20p



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         1£
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +3    5    5    4    4    4    4




                                                                                                                                                               chapt. 7.4 on page 23).
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        4
                                                                                                                                   Switch on the jukebox.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          BR    4    4    3    3    3    3




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          GB
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       T1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                3    3    2    2    2    2             10
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2    2    1    1    1    1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         50p
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                10p
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              M   LT
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       20
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        T
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                0    0    0    0    0    0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       +B
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         GP + 6 GP   BS   B4   B3   B2   B1
                                           Price settings




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      nus setting.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Examples
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          T.T.  F    7         6    6    6




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Free Play
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +2    6    6         5    5    5              2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          +3    5    5         4    4    4              4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          BR    4    4         3    3    3              5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       T1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                3    3         2    2    2             10
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2    2         1    1    1    M        20
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                0    0         0    0    0        LT    T
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       +B
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         GP + 6 GP   BS   B4   B3   B2   B1




                                                                                                                                   1.

                                                                                                                                                               2.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      3.


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      4.
Price settings




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            22
                                           7.1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               7.2
                 7
                                                                                                                                                            OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Free play programming




7.3         Free play programming
            Set a jumper from 0 to F (free play) in the row GP
            on the SCC unit and be sure that jumper GP+6 is
            removed. Then press ‘LT’ button.




                                                                                                                                                                Credit Computer
                                                                                                                                                                  Selection &
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            CD TOWER
            Now one track is selectable without coin insertion.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            K
                                                                                                                                               CDM 12




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  SERVICE
            In between two to six plays are selectable by set-
            ting an additionally jumper in the row ‘BS’ (Bonus




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              OFF
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               ON



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Z
            Step) from 0 to 2 or from 0 to 6.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 GP + 6 GP



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  BR
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  +3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  +2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  T.T.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     GP




                                                                                                                                                                       ATTENTION:



                                                                                                                                                                                                                       ATTENTION: Move MEMORY Plug from OFF



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      ACHTUNG:




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        F
            Up to 47 tracks are pre-selectable by setting a jum-                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         BS




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 7
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 BS
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 B4
                                                                                                                                               caisse sont demandés.
                                                                                                                                               popularité et la contenu de la
                                                                                                                                               si le Top Tunes, le compteur de
                                                                                                                                               position ON, de la position OFF
                                                                                                                                               Placer la prise MEMORY en

                                                                                                                                                                                    is required.
                                                                                                                                                                                    Cash Box Content Registration
                                                                                                                                                                                    to ON if Top tunes, Pop Meter or


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               oder Kassenzähler arbeiten soll.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Top tunes, Popularitätszähler
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               auf ON umstecken, wenn
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               MEMORY - Stecker von OFF
            per in this row ‘BS’ from 0 to 7.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 B3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 B2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 3
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 6
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 B1
                                                                                                                                 0045411




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              M
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         LT




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             LT
                                                                                                                                           Memory



                                                                                                                                                                               P8 8



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              P5 1

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                P6 1
                                                                                                                                              OFF

                                                                                                                                              ON


                                                                                                                                                                                    1



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 5

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   6




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             +B



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           T1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           20
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           10
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    T


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            5
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            1
7.4         Color codes of coin input

                                                  mechanical coin validator                                                                                                                                                           electronical coin validator

                                                 USA                                                                                                                                                        AUS
                                                                                                                  SCC                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       SCC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             LT
                                                                                             LT




                                                                                                                       +B




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           +B
                                                                                                         T1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             T1
                                                                                                         20




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             20
                                                                                                         10




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             10
                                                                                                                   T




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      T
                                                       1
                                                       2




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  2
                                                                                4




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                4
                                                                                5




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                5            50ct orange



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2$ green
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  brown
                                                                                             1$ orange




                                                                                                                    brown




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   20ct red
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  10ct blue




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 violet
                                                                                1$ grey




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             1$ yellow
                                                                                                                     white
                                                       0.25 blue




                                                                                                         yellow




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           DIP switches
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      off - on
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 1               10 ct
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           on interface
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Cash-                                                                                              2               20 ct
                                                             mechanical                                                                                                                                                                                        flow                                                                                              3               50 ct
                                                             coin validator                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      4               1$
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      111                                                                                        5               2$
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 6




                                                  electronical coin validator                                                                                                                                                         electronical coin validator

                                                  GB                                                                                                                                     EURO
                                                                                                                  SCC                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       SCC
                                                                                             LT




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             LT
                                                                                                                       +B




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           +B
                                                                                                         T1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             T1
                                                                                                         20




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             20
                                                                                                         10




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             10
                                                                                                                   T




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      T
                                                       1
                                                       2




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  2
                                                                                4




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                4
                                                                                5




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                5
                                                                                                            green




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  1.00 brown
                                                                                                         1£ brown




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     0.50 red
                                                                                20p orange




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                2.00 white
                                                                                                             violet




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      green
                                                                                                              grey
                                                                                                          50p red




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            grey
                                                                   10p yellow




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      violet




                                                                                                   Interface                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Interface
                                                   NRI                                                                                                                                                                                                             NRI
                                                                                                                        Credit                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Credit
                                                   G13                                                                                                                                                                                                           G13




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  23
                         Selecting, displaying and programming of top tunes




                         7.5         Selecting, displaying and programming of top tunes
                                     You can select the most played tracks
                                     (top tunes) by selecting 9999 in the nor-         As example we use the US price settings
                                                                                       50cts 1 play, $1.00 3 plays, $5.00 21 plays
                                     mal operation mode, provided that the
                                     2nd bonus step (B2) of the jukebox is re-
                                     ached by coin insertion. The total number
                                     of played tracks depends on the bonus
                                     price settings of the first two bonus levels
                                     (B1 and B2, ref also to chap. 1.6). In ad-             T.T.  F                                    7                 6       6     6        6
                                                                                                                                                                                                              1
                                                                                            +2    6                                    6                 5       5     5        5
                                     dition to this setting the jukebox plays one           +3    5                                    5                 4       4     4        4
                                                                                                                                                                                                              2
                                                                                                                                                                                                              4
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                     track more.                                            BR    4                                    4                 3       3     3        3                             5
                                                                                                                                                                                                             T1
                                                                                                  3                                    3                 2       2     2        2                            10
                                     After having reached the bonus level 2                       2                                    2                 1       1     1        1              M             20
                                                                                                  0                                    0                 0       0     0        0                      LT        T
                                     the SCC unit gives 7 credits (4 basic cre-                                                                                                                              +B
                                     dits in total + 1 bonus credit from B1 + 2            GP + 6 GP                                   BS                B4      B3    B2       B1
                                     basic credits from B2 = 7 credits total). If
                                     you select the top tunes with 9999 the
                                     jukebox plays one track more (= 8



                                                                                             $ 1.00




                                                                                                                                       21 plays $ 5.00
                                                                                                                      3 plays $ 1.00
                                                                                                      1 play 50 cts
                                                                                                                                                          T.T.  F     7    6    6    6    6
                                     tracks).                                                                                                             +2    6     6    5    5    5    5                  1
                                                                                                                                                                                                             2
                                                                                                                                                          +3    5     5    4    4    4    4                  4
                                                                                                                                                          BR    4     4    3    3    3    3                  5
                                                                                                                                                                                                            T1
                                     If you set an additional jumper from TT                                                                                    3     3    2    2    2    2


                                                                                             $ 1.00
                                                                                                                                                                                                            10
                                                                                                                                                                2     2    1    1    1    1        M        20
                                                                                                                                                                                                       LT
                                     (Top Tunes) of the SCC unit to +2 the
                                                                                                                                                                                                             T
                                                                                                                                                                0     0    0    0    0    0
                                                                                                                                                                                                            +B
                                                                                             25cts
                                                                                                                                                         GP + 6 GP    BS   B4   B3   B2   B1
                                     jukebox plays two additional tracks (in our
                                     example 9 tracks).

                                     If you set a jumper from TT to +3 the jukebox plays 3 additional tracks (in our example 10 tracks).

                                     To find out which tracks will be played after selecting 9999 you can display the tracks by entering
                                     9998. At first the most played track will be displayed. Then you have to enter 9998 again and the
                                     jukebox shows the second most played track etc. To display the tracks the SCC unit needs about 2-3
                                     sec for calculation. If the display starts to flash press the selection button R once.




                               24                                                                                                                                PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                 Price settings:


                                                                                                                           ...............




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                              1            ...............
                                                                                                              2            ...............
                                                                                                              4
                                                                                                              5            ...............
                                                                                                              T1           test credit
                                                                                                                           ...............
                                                                                                              10
                                                                                                              20           ...............
                                                                                                              T
                                                                                                                           ...............
                                                                                                              +B               GND
                                                                                                                           ...............
                                                                                                                              +35 V !
                                                                                                                           ...............




                                 pulse         1.   2.   3.   4.   5.   6.   7.   8.   9.   10.   11.   12.   13.    14.   15.       16.     17.   18.   19.   20.   21.   22.   23.   24.   25.

                                 inserted
                                 money

                                 plays from
                                 GP:
                                 from bonus
                                 step

                                 plays
                                 B1...B4

                                 total plays




        25
                                                                                                                                                                                                   Selecting, displaying and programming of top tunes




                                                                                                                    OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
                         Selecting, displaying and programming of top tunes




                         8                Programming short view


                                                                                                                                             Jukebox in normal
                                                                                                         Slide switch
                                                                                                                                              operation mode
                                                                                                          'SERVICE'
                                                                                                            to ON
                                                                                                         and press LT                                                                                 Slide switch
                                                   Start of serviceprogram                                                                                                                             'SERVICE'
                                                                                                         button once.
                                                      display of program                                                                                                                                 to OFF
                                                            version                                                                                                                                   and press LT
                                                                                                                                                                                                      button once.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                             Press button R
                              -hold down-
                               and press
                                button 0,
                                                     0            1             2               3           4              5           6              7             8              9               R         selection buttons

                                 then...


                                               1                                                                   Statistics
                                    ...press        Flops       Top hits    Cash box           total      Display       CDs in      memory                          Box       sel. memory      to level 1
                                    button 1
                                                   Display:    Display:      contents        number        test      magazines         bad         reserved         ID           reset        + button 0:
                                    to reach
                                                   1. CD no.   1. CD no.    printer start
                                                                                             of plays     program                      CDs                                                       enter
                                    service         2. plays    2. plays    button 2 + R                  version       01 - 99                                   8digits     Albumsel.        new level
                                    level 1.




                                               2                                              Time, Bonus, Playstimulator
                                    ...press        Time         Day          Year           tracks      disabled                    Happy          Happy           Play         Play           to level 2
                                    button 2                    Month        Weekday         per CD       tracks      reserved        Hour           Hour        stimulator   stimulator       + button 0:
                                    to reach        HH:MM       DD:MM         YY:WW                       CD:TT                       time          price           start      Interval           enter
                                    service                                                                                                                         stop                        new level
                                    level 2.




                                               3                                                 Back Ground Music, BGM
                                    ...press        BGM          BGM           BGM            BGM          BGM           BGM          BGM            BGM           BGM          Printer         to level 3
                                    button 3
                                                    times        times         times          times        times         times        times       no. of CD's,     start       settings        + button 0:
                                    to reach                                                                                                                      position                        enter
                                                   weekday 0   weekday 1     weekday 2       weekday 3   weekday 4    weekday 5     weekday 6       Interval                  110 baud
                                    service         Sunday      Monday       Tuesday        Wednesday    Thursday      Friday       Saturday                                                    new level
                                                                                                                                                      time        options     9600 baud
                                    level 3.




                                               4                                                       CD2 mechanism tests
                                    ...press        reserved   Selection     Selection        Get CD      Get CD     Test prg.      Test prg.     Gates test       CD2           Test           to level 4
                                    button 4           for      sledge        sledge         from LH     from RH     single step    single step    VH.V.HV        errors       programs        + button 0:
                                    to reach         CD to      in steps      in steps       change to   change to        ON           OFF         LL.L.LL                      button 9          enter
                                    service        turntable   downwards      upwards         level 5     level 5        NEXT                      LL.C.RR       2. Spiele    + no. of prg.     new level
                                    level 4.




                                               5                                                          CD player tests
                                    ...press        NEXT       Anzeige:      Anzeige:         STOP       Anzeige:    Anzeige:       Anzeige:      Anzeige:       Anzeige:     PREVIOUS          to level 5
                                    button 5
                                                    track      reserved      reserved          and       reserved     STOP          START         reserved       reserved      TRACK           + button 0:
                                    to reach        1. CD         1. CD        1. CD          back to      1. CD          1. CD       1. CD          1. CD         1. CD        1. CD             enter
                                    service         NEXT        2. Spiele    2. Spiele        level 4    2. Spiele      2. Spiele   2. Spiele      2. Spiele     2. Spiele    PREVIOUS          new level
                                    level 5.




                                                      0           1              2              3           4              5           6              7             8             9                R

                                  Programming: Press according button - hold down - and press selection button R , release both buttons and enter the new value.




                                 26                                                                                                                                           PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                 Calling service programs




9           Jukebox programming
            Additional features like Playstimulator, BGM time and Happy Hour time are programmable. These
            features are programmable in the service mode of the SCC unit.


9.1         Calling service programs
            Hint:
            To keep the data stored when power is off
            the plug “Memory” must be set to “ON” posi-




                                                                                                                             OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            tion on the SCC unit, otherwise all program-
            med data in service levels are reset when
            power is interrupted.
                                                                                                          1. Service to ON
            Calling service programs:
            Set slide switch “Service” from position OFF         2. Press LT button          Memory
            to ON, then press the LT button. After an ini-
            tialization run the display will show the actual                      3. Display shows:
            jukebox (SCC) program version (e.g.: in the
            display 4.09) and gives a message whether
            the magazines are installed properly.                                                 Press LT button


                                                                Service level 1


                                                                Statistics            display:
                             no magazines missing

                                                                                                  Press LT button
                             RH magazine missing
                                                                Service level 2
                                                                Time setting,
                             LH magazine missing                Bonus,Playstimul.     Display:



                             both magazines missing                                               Press LT button


            Calling service levels:                             Service level 3
            By pressing the LT button. The display              Back ground
            shows the actual service level number in the        music (BGM)           Display:
            LH digit. Each option can be called by pres-
            sing the corresponding selection button.
                                                                                                  Press LT button

            Calling a certain service level (recommen-
            ded method):                                        Service level 4
            Press selection button R - hold down - and          Test functiones
                                                                CD2 mechanism         Display:
            press selection button 0. Release both but-
            tons. The display is dark.
                                                                                                  Press LT button
            Enter the number of the desired service le-
            vel.
                                                                Service level 5
            Exit:                                               Test functiones
                                                                CDM12 player          Display:
            Set the slide switch ‘SERVICE’ to OFF and
            press the LT button once.
                                                                                                  Press LT button




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                      27
                         Programming of time functions




                         9.2          Programming of time functions
                                      Level 2                                                                        slide switch
                                      It is necessary to program the time, date and weekday                            service                                                   LT button
                                      once or at least to control these settings. Only then the
                                      jukebox can switch on and off the playstimulator or the
                                      Back Ground Music at the desired time. It is useful to                                          Z    T.T.  F       7        6        6      6                          1
                                                                                                                                           +2    6       6        5        5      5                          2
                                                                                                                                           +3    5       5        4        4      4                          4
                                                                                                                    K                      BR    4       4        3        3      3                          5
                                                                                                                                     ON          3       3        2        2      2                         T1

                                      program time, date and weekday in a single pass.                                    SERVICE
                                                                                                                                    OFF          2
                                                                                                                                                 0
                                                                                                                                          GP + 6 GP
                                                                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                                                                         0
                                                                                                                                                         BS
                                                                                                                                                                  1
                                                                                                                                                                  0
                                                                                                                                                               B4 B3
                                                                                                                                                                           1
                                                                                                                                                                           0
                                                                                                                                                                           B2
                                                                                                                                                                                  1
                                                                                                                                                                                  0
                                                                                                                                                                                  B1
                                                                                                                                                                                              M    LT
                                                                                                                                                                                                            10
                                                                                                                                                                                                            20  T
                                                                                                                                                                                                            +B




                                      To program the time (and also the date):                                                                    ACHTUNG:      MEMORY - Stecker von OFF                 P6 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                            6
                                                                                                                                                                auf ON umstecken, wenn
                                                                                                                                                                Top tunes, Popularitätszähler
                                                                                                                                                                oder Kassenzähler arbeiten soll.         P5 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                            5
                                                                                                                  CD TOWER                        ATTENTION: Move MEMORY Plug from OFF
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                                                                                                                                                to ON if Top tunes, Pop Meter or

                                                                                                                  Selection &                                   Cash Box Content Registration


                                      1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC-unit to ON.
                                                                                                                                                                is required.                                1
                                                                                                                                                                                                         P8 8
                                                                                                                Credit Computer                   ATTENTION: Placer la prise MEMORY en
                                                                                                                                                                position ON, de la position OFF
                                                                                                                                                                si le Top Tunes, le compteur de
                                                                                                                                                                popularité et la contenu de la
                                                                                                                        CDM 12                                  caisse sont demandés.                      ON
                                                                                                                                                                                                        Memory
                                                                                                                                                                                                           OFF
                                                                                                                                                                                     0045411

                                      2.   Press ‘LT’ button.

                                      3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.

                                      4.   Press selection button 2. Service level 2 is reached. Display shows: 2_ _ _.


                         9.2.1        Clock setting, level 2 button 0
                                      Press selection button 0. The display shows the current time.

                                      If the displayed time is not correct:                                  Example:

                                      Press selection button 0 -hold down- and press selection button R.
                                      Release both buttons. Enter the correct time with four digits.
                                                                                                                                                  hours
                                                                                                                                                                             minutes

                         9.2.2        Set date, level 2 button 1
                                      Press selection button 1. The display shows the current date.
                                                                                                             Example:
                                      If the displayed date is not correct:

                                      Press selection button 1 -hold down- and press selection button R.
                                      Release both buttons. Enter the correct date with four digits.                                                  day
                                                                                                                                                                                month

                         9.2.3        Set year and weekday, level 2 button 2
                                      To display the year and the weekday press selection button 2:
                                                                                                             Example:
                                      The weekdays are assigned to numbers as shown.

                                      0 = Sunday                      4 = Thursday
                                                                                                                                                     year
                                      1 = Monday                      5 = Friday
                                                                                                                                                                          weekday
                                      2 = Tuesday                     6 = Saturday
                                      3 = Wednesday

                                      To program press selection button 2 -hold down- and press selection button R. Release both but-
                                      tons. Enter the correct year with two digits, then enter a 0 followed by the number of the weekday.

                                      Exit the service program:

                                      1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to OFF.

                                      2.   Press ‘LT’ button.
                                           # The changer starts an initialisation run. After this the jukebox is ready to use.




                                 28                                                                                PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                             Programming of the Playstimulator (random selections without




9.3         Programming of the Playstimulator (random selections without coin insertion)
            In service level 1 button 5 the actual number of CDs in the magazines is registered. If the playstimu-
            lator is programmed the jukebox plays random tracks of these CDs. Exception: CDs declared as
            BGM CDs will not be used! The time between the last track played by inserted money and the first
            random track of the playstimulator is programmable from 1 up to 98 min. This time is also the repeat
            time between two random plays.

            The volume is the same as in normal operation. If a selection is made the playstimulator will be inter-
            rupted immediately. It starts again after all selected tracks have been played.




                                                                                                                                                                     OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
9.3.1       Repeat time programming, level 2 button 9

            NOTE: The playstimulator only works
            !    if Back Ground Music is not activated at the same time
            !    if time is programmed correctly
            !    if no credit is available

            1.    Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to ON.

            2.    Press ‘LT’ button. Display shows e.g.: _ 4 0 9
                  # (409 or higher = SCC program version)

            3.    Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 then release both buttons.
                  The display is dark.

            4.    Press selection button 2. Service level 2 is reached. Display shows: 2_ _ _.

            5.    Press selection button 9. The display shows three digits.
                  # A = repeat time is set to 5 minutes                              Example:
                  # B = This digit enables or disables the Playstimulator
                     mode,
                     0 = Playstimulator OFF,
                     1 = Playstimulator ON                                                                                               B
                                                                                                                                                               A

            Playstimulator operating modes:
            You can set the jukebox in an easy way to CONTINUOUS
            PLAY MODE by programming the digit CONTINUOUS PLAY to
            ‘1’. An additional progamming of the clock and the start and
            stop time is not necessary.
                                                                                                               continuously playing
                                                                                                                of random tracks

            By means of an optional installed switch you can also switch the
                                                                                                                                                      0
                                                                                                                                                      1
                                                                                                                                                      2
                                                                                                                                                      3
                                                                                                                                                      4
                                                                                                                                                      5
                                                                                                                                                      6
                                                                                                                                                      B1
                                                                                     0045411




            box to CONTINUOUS PLAY MODE without any need of ente-
                                                                                                                                                               M




            ring the service program. Part number of this switch is 0034410.
                                                                                                                                                               LT




            It has to be connected to P8 of the SCC unit.
                                                                                               Memory



                                                                                                        P8 8



                                                                                                               P5 1

                                                                                                                      P6 1
                                                                                                  OFF

                                                                                                  ON



                                                                                                          1



                                                                                                                  5

                                                                                                                         6




                                                                                                                                                      +B



                                                                                                                                                           T1
                                                                                                                                                           20
                                                                                                                                                           10
                                                                                                                                                           T


                                                                                                                                                            5
                                                                                                                                                            4
                                                                                                                                                            2
                                                                                                                                                            1
                                                                                                                      off

                                                                                                                             on


                                                                                                                                         Continuous
                                                                                                                                  Play




                                                                                               CONTINUOUS PLAY switch




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                  29
                         Programming of the Playstimulator (random selections without




                                      A more precise programming in conjunction with the internal clock and the start, stop and repeat
                                      time is posssible if the digit CONTINUOUS PLAY is set to ‘0’. A correct programming of all these
                                      items is necessary.

                                      NO random plays



                                      Continuous random plays, however in conjunction with start and
                                      stop time.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                      After a played random track the jukebox waits about 5 minutes
                                      before it starts the next one. Random tracks will only be played
                                      in the programmed Playstimulator time interval. The program-
                                      ming of this 'time window' is described as follows.

                                      To program press selection button 9 -hold down- and press selection button R. Release both but-
                                      tons. Now enter the digit for CONTINUOUS PLAY and the REPEAT TIME with three digits.

                                      To check the settings: Press button 9 again.


                         9.3.2        Programming start and stop time, level 2 button 8
                                      Press selection button 8. The display shows at first a flashing 1.
                                      This means 'start time'.


                                      Then the time will be displayed, here 14.05 o' clock (2.05 p.m.).



                                      Press selection button 8 once again. The display shows now a
                                      flashing 2. This means 'stop time'.


                                      Then the time will be displayed, here 18.30 o' clock (6.30 p.m.).



                                      To reprogramme press selection button 8 - hold - and press selection button R. Release both but-
                                      tons. The digital display goes dark. Enter the start and stop time with eight digits.

                                      Example: The jukebox should play random tracks from 09.00 in the morning to 17.00 in the af-
                                      ternoon.

                                      Enter: 0 - 9 - 0 - 0 - 1 - 7 - 0 - 0 (0900 = start time, 1700 = stop time)

                                      Then press selection button R. The display shows 2 _ _ _ .

                                      To check the start time: Press selection button 8.

                                      To check the stop time: Press selection button 8 again.

                                      NOTE: You can not programme the playstimulator over 24.00 o’clock (e.g. 23.00 to 2.00 o'clock) !




                                 30                                                                                PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                              BackGround Music (BGM), level 3




            If the Playstimulator does not work:


            Check if:
            !    the clock is set correctly ?
            !    start and stop time is programmed?
            !    repeat time is set correctly (not 0)?
            !    BGM play mode is disabled (ref. to next chapter).
            !    credits are still in memory.




                                                                                                                                                                                             OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            Exit the serviceprogram:

            1.    Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to OFF.

            2.    Press ‘LT’ button.
                  The changer starts an initialisation run. After this the jukebox is ready to operate.


9.4         BackGround Music (BGM), level 3
            If BGM is programmed and activated a random
                                                                                        Tone
            track from the CDs declared for BGM will be                    Treble                        4
                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                                                    Low Level                                            R
                                                                                                         1
                                                                                                                                                                             Input CD
            played. The time between the last selected                      Bass
                                                                                                         4
                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                         1
                                                                                                                   L          R
                                                                                                                                                                                         L
                                                                          P10    off           on
            played track and the first BGM track is program-              Remote                                       Clipping                  Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                                  0039155
                                                                                                                                                                                         R
            mable between 1 and 98 minutes. This time is                                                                                                                    Input Tape
                                                                                                                                                                                         L
            also the repeat time between two BGM tracks.                  P10
                                                                          Remote          Mode
                                                                              Stereo                2-Kanal
                                                                                 CD                 Tape                                                         Mic.-Kit
                                                                                          Input
            The volume for BGM reproduction is reduced                                    Volume
                                                                                                              32
                                                                                                                              R                 R
            compared to the normal volume. It is adjustable                        R
                                                                                                              16
                                                                                                               8
                                                                                                               4
                                                                                                                                                BGM Level
                                                                                                               2

            with the two BGM pots (RH channel / LH chan-             P4
                                                                          BGM
                                                                                                               1
                                                                                                              32
                                                                                                              16
                                                                                                                              L                 L                                    R

                                                                                                                                                                             Line Out
            nel) on the amplifier. BGM mode is active when                          L
                                                                                                               8
                                                                                                               4
                                                                                                               2
                                                                                                                                                                                     L
                                                                                                               1

            the LED on the amplifiers lights. The source of                             off         on



            the BGM control signal is the SCC unit plug
            brown (X6), pin 1. Once the BGM mode is acti-
            vated, it is not possible to operate the Playsti-
            mulator.                                                                                                                                pots to level
                                                                   BGM light emitting diode                                                         the BGM volume
            If a selection is made by means of coin insertion      (yellow), indicates whether
                                                                   BGM is active
            the track being played will be interrupted imme-
            diately. Two intervals can be programmed for
            each weekday.

            To enable BGM (level 3):

            1.    Set the slide switch ‘service’ on the SCC-unit to ON.

            2.    Press ‘LT’ button.

            3.    Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.

            4.    Press selection button 3. Service level 3 is reached. Display shows: 3_ _ _.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                   31
                         BackGround Music (BGM), level 3




                         9.4.1        Number of BGM CDs and repeat time, level 3 button 7
                                      Press selection button 7 the diplay shows e.g.:

                                      A=      number of BGM CDs; disabled for playstimulator! (The posi-
                                              tion of the first BGM CD will be programmed in the next step;
                                              ref to sec. 9.4.2)
                                                                                                                                    A
                                                                                                                                         B
                                      B=      repeat time between BGM tracks (10 min.)
                                              BGM-continuous play = 99
                                              BGM OFF = 00

                                      To program press selection button 7 -hold down- and press selection button R. Release both but-
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                      tons. The display goes dark. Enter the number of CDs and the repeat time by means of the selection
                                      buttons.


                         9.4.2        Start position for BGM CDs and configuration, level 3 button 8
                                      Press button 8. The start position of the BGM CDs is displayed in the left two digits. The RH digit in-
                                      dicates the actual BGM mode.

                                      A = start position of BGM CDs

                                      B = not used, always 0

                                      C = BGM mode
                                                                                                                                A
                                      You can determine the digit for the BGM mode as follows:                                       B
                                                                                                                                         C

                                      BGM mode                                              selection
                                      You want to select BGM CDs by coin insertion too:     yes -> 0; no -> 1
                                      You want that the jukebox plays BGM-CDs also          yes -> 2; no -> 0
                                      if credit still exists:
                                      BGM start position over 100:                          yes -> 4; no -> 0

                                      Select the desired features and add the corresponding code numbers. Enter the sum of the code
                                      numbers as the mode digit.

                                      Example:
                                      BGM-CDs not selectable by coin insertion                =               1
                                      BGM-CDs should not be played at still existing          =               0
                                      credits
                                      BGM start position over 100                             =               4
                                      Mode number                                             =               5

                                      To program press selection button 8 - hold - and press selection button R. The digital display goes
                                      dark. Enter start position (2 digits) followed by a ‘0’ and the BGM mode (1 digit)!

                                      After entering this data the SCC unit calculates the BGM end position itself. For loading of BGM
                                      discs the end position can be calculated as follows:

                                      end position = start position + number of BGM-CDs - 1.

                                      NOTE: If a wall box is connected the BGM selection option must be set to 0.




                                 32                                                                               PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                        BackGround Music (BGM), level 3




9.4.3       BGM time zones at different weekdays, level 3 button 0 - 6
            You can program each weekday differently with two intervals per day. The following steps are the
            same for the buttons 1 to 6 in service level 3 according the table for weekdays.

            1.   Press button 0, the display shows flashing:
                 # 0 (LH) = Sunday
                    1 means start time one
                 # programmed time will be displayed, here 9.00 o'clock




                                                                                                                              OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            2.   Press selection button 0 again, the display shows flashing:
                 # 0 (LH) = Sunday
                    2 means stop time one
                 # programmed time will be displayed, here 12.30 o'clock



            3.   Press selection button 0 again, the display shows flashing:
                 # 0 (LH) = Sunday
                    3 means start time two
                 # programmed time will be displayed, here 20.00 o'clock



            4.   Press selection button 0 again, the display shows flashing:
                 # 0 (LH) = Sunday
                    4 means stop time two
                 # programmed time will be displayed, here 23.45 o'clock


            To program press selection button 0 (or button 1 - 6 depending on the week-
            day to be programmed). The digital display goes dark. Enter the two time zo-
            nes in four blocks containing four digits per block one after another (16 digits).

            Table of weekdays:

            0 = Sunday                     4 = Thursday
            1 = Monday                     5 = Friday
            2 = Tuesday                    6 = Saturday
            3 = Wednesday


            Examples:                                             0-9-3-0        1-1-4-5       1-7-0-0          1-9-5-5
            The jukebox should play BGM on Tuesday from
            9.30 to 11.45 and from 17.00 to 19.55. To pro-
                                                                  start time 1                   start time 2
            gram press selection button 2 - hold - and press
            selection button R. The digital display goes dark.                   stop time 1                    stop time 2
            Then enter 0-9-3-0-1-1-4-5-1-7-0-0-1-9-5-5.

            If the jukebox should play BGM on Wednesday from 17.00 to 19.55 only, then program on selection
            button 3 as described: 1-7-0-0-1-9-5-5-0-0-0-0-0-0-0-0 . The second time zone has to be filled with
            zeros. Also this programming is possible:

            0-0-0-0-0-0-0-0-1-7-0-0-1-9-5-5.

            Repeat this procedure until all weekdays are programmed (selection buttons 0 to 6).



PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                   33
                         Happy hour pricing (additional bonus plays)




                         9.5          Happy hour pricing (additional bonus plays)
                                      During the ‘Happy hour’ time additional bonus plays can be given. Happy hour time zone and num-
                                      ber of additional bonus plays have to be programmed as follows.


                         9.5.1        Programming of the happy hour start and stop time, level 2 button 6

                                      1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to ON.

                                      2.   Press ‘LT’ button. Display shows e.g.: _ 4 0 9
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                           # (409 or higher = SCC program version)

                                      3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0, then release both buttons.
                                           The display is dark.

                                      4.   Press selection button 2. Service level 2 is reached. Display shows: 2_ _ _.

                                      5.   Press selection button 6. The display shows flashing:
                                           # 1 means start time

                                           # the start time will be displayed with four digits e.g.: 9.00 o’ clock



                                      6.   Press selection button 6 again. The display shows flashing:
                                           # 2 means stop time


                                           # the stop time will be displayed with four digits e.g.: 12.30 o’ clock

                                      7.   To reprogram press selection button 6 - hold - and press selection button
                                           R. The digital display goes dark. Enter the ‘Happy hour’ start and stop
                                           time with 8 digits. After complete entry the digital display is dark.
                                           # Example: “Happy Hour” should operate from 09.05 to 11.00 o’clock.
                                               Enter 8 figures: 0 - 9 - 0 - 5 - 1 - 1 - 0 - 0 .

                                      8.   To check the settings: Repeat the steps 5 and 6.


                         9.5.2        Programming of the additional bonus plays, level 2 button 7

                                      1.   Press selection button 7. The display shows e.g.:
                                           # 1 additional play at bonus level 4 (B1)
                                           # 3 additional plays at bonus level 3 (B2)
                                           # 5 additional plays at bonus level 2 (B3)
                                           # 7 additional plays at bonus level 1 (B4)
                                                                                                                                 B1        B3
                                                                                                                                      B2        B4
                                      2.   To reprogram press selection button 7 - hold - and press selection but-
                                           ton R. The digital display goes dark. Enter the new happy hour pricing
                                           with 4 digits.

                                      3.   To check the new setting, press selection button 7 again.

                                      4.   To exit the service program set the slide switch ‘SERVICE’ to OFF and press button LT on the
                                           SCC unit.



                                 34                                                                                  PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                             Number of tracks played successively on the same disc, level 2




9.6         Number of tracks played successively on the same disc, level 2 button 3
            The display shows the maximum number of tracks played successivly from the same disc. Preset va-
            lue = 04 tracks, i.e. after four tracks from this CD have been played it will be taken back to the maga-
            zine, and the next CD stored in the selection memory will be played. If selections still exist for the
            previous CD they will be played later.This option to limit the tracks played from one CD is more use-
            ful for operators. For individual use this value can be set up to 99.

            To call the service program (level 2):

            1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to ON.




                                                                                                                              OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            2.   Press ‘LT’ button. Display shows e.g.: _ 4 0 9
                 # (409 or higher = SCC program version)

            3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.
                 The display is dark.

            4.   Press selection button 2. Service level 2 is reached. Display shows: 2_ _ _.

            5.   Press selection button 3 the display shows e.g.: 04 = factory setting for
                 number of tracks played successivly on the same disc.

            6.   To program press selection button 3 - hold - and press selection button R.
                 The digital display goes dark. Enter the desired setting by means of the selection buttons with
                 two digits.


                 If you set this value to 01 all selections will be played in selection order.

            7.   To check the settings: Press selection button 3 again.

            8.   To exit the service program set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to OFF and press the
                 ‘LT’ button once.The changer starts an initialisation run. After this the jukebox is ready to ope-
                 rate.


9.7         Disabling single tracks
            You can disable up to maxinmum 25 different tracks of different CD's. If somebody selects a disabled
            track the digital display flashes. This shows that this track is not selectable. Note a special peculiarity
            at playstimulator or BGM operation. The random procedure always selects tracks out of a number of
            35. If the random selected track exceeds the number of tracks on the CD the procedure starts to
            count from the beginnung of the CD. Result is, if you want to disable e.g. track 8 on a CD with 17
            tracks you also have to disable track 23 on this disc although it does not really exist.

            To disable tracks (service program level 2):

            1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC-unit to ON.

            2.   Press ‘LT’ button.

            3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.

            4.   Press selection button 2. Service level 2 is reached. Display shows: 2_ _ _.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                   35
                         Location or Identification number, level 1 button 8




                                      5.    Press selection button 4 the display shows e.g.:
                                            # Each operation of selection button 4 indicates the next disab-
                                               led track, maximum 25 tracks.
                                            # After having reached the last disabled track, the first one is in-
                                               dicated again. If the display shows 0000 after the first button
                                               operation no track is disabled.                                                           track
                                                                                                                           CD number
                                                                                                                                        number

                                      6.    To program: Press selection button 4 - hold - and press selection
                                            button R. The digital display goes dark

                                      7.    Enter at first the CD number to be disabled followed by the track number (total four digits).
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                      8.    To disable the next CD/track, press selection button 4 several times until display shows 0 0 0 0 .

                                      9.    Press selection button 4 again - hold - and press selection button R. The digital display goes
                                            dark. Then enter CD and track to be disabled. Continue programming for the next track to be
                                            disabled with step 8.

                                      10. To check the diabled tracks: Press selection button 4 again (up to 25 times, for 25 disabled
                                          tracks).

                                      11. To exit the service program set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to OFF and press the
                                          LT button.


                                      To enable a disabled track:
                                      When a track is indicated, press button 4 - hold - and press selection button R and enter first the
                                      number of the CD followed by 0 0.

                                      To enable all disabled tracks:
                                      Press selection button 4 -hold down- and press selection button R. Then enter 0 0 0 0 (4 times 0).


                         9.8          Location or Identification number, level 1 button 8
                                      A location or identification number (8 digits) can be programmed.

                                      To enter the number (Service program level 1):

                                      1.    Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC-unit to ON.

                                      2.    Press ‘LT’ button.

                                      3.    Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.

                                      4.    Press selection button 1. Service level 1 is reached. Display shows: 1_ _ _.

                                      5.    Press selection button 8, the display shows flashing:
                                            # 1 means higher digits




                                            # Then the four higher digits will be displayed.




                               36                                                                                  PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                           Album selection and memory reset by power off, level 1 button 9




            6.   Press selection button 8 again, the display shows flashing:
                 # 2 means lower digits




                 # Then the four lower digits will be displayed.
                 # In this case the number is 8543 1049.

            7.   To reprogram press selection button 8 - hold - and press selection button
                 R. The digital display goes dark. Then enter the complete number with 8
                 digits.




                                                                                                                             OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            8.   To check the settings: Press selection button 8 again.

            9.   To exit the service program set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to OFF and press the
                 LT button.


9.9         Album selection and memory reset by power off, level 1 button 9
            By setting the corresponding digit these options are available.

            Album selection is possible by entering the disc number followed by 0 0 (track 0 0). All tracks on the
            CD are played, starting with the first track. An album is only selectable by coin insertion, if credits of
            the 4th bonus level have been obtained or in free play modus (link in row GP from 0 to F on the SCC
            unit) of the jukebox.

            Memory reset feature will cancel remaining credits and selections by power off of the jukebox. This
            option prevents the jukebox playing preselected tracks from the day before (the jukebox was swit-
            ched off in the night.).

            To change the settings (Service program, level 1):

            1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC-unit to ON.

            2.   Press ‘LT’ button.

            3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 then release both buttons.

            4.   Press selection button 1. Service level 1 is reached. Display shows: 1_ _ _.

            5.   Press selection button 9, the display shows e.g.:
                 # A = digit for memory reset by power off; 1 = ON, 0 = OFF
                 # B = digit for albumplay; 1 = ON, 0 = OFF

            6.   To change the settings press selection button 9 - hold - and press selec-
                                                                                                               A
                 tion button R. The digital display goes dark. Enter the desired setting                           B
                 with two digits.

            7.   To check the settings: Press selection button 9 again.

            8.   To exit the service program set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to OFF and press the
                 LT button.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                  37
                         Operator data




                         10          Data retrieval
                                     The data retrieval memory stores data only if the plug ‘ME-




                                                                                                                                                    0
                                                                                                                                                    1
                                                                                                                                                    2
                                                                                                                                                    3
                                                                                                                                                    4
                                                                                                                                                    5
                                                                                                                                                    6
                                                                                                                                                    B1
                                                                                                          0045411
                                     MORY’ is always in the position ON (on the buttom side of the




                                                                                                                                                             M
                                     SCC unit).




                                                                                                                                                             LT
                                                                                                                    Memory



                                                                                                                               P8 8



                                                                                                                                      P5 1

                                                                                                                                             P6 1
                                                                                                                       OFF

                                                                                                                       ON



                                                                                                                                 1



                                                                                                                                         5

                                                                                                                                                6




                                                                                                                                                    +B



                                                                                                                                                         T1
                                                                                                                                                         20
                                                                                                                                                         10
                                                                                                                                                         T


                                                                                                                                                          5
                                                                                                                                                          4
                                                                                                                                                          2
                                                                                                                                                          1
                         10.1        Operator data
                                     You can read out statistical data in the service program level 1
                                     over the display.                                                  Memory
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                     1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC-unit to ON.

                                     2.   Press ‘LT’ button.

                                     3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.

                                     4.   Press selection button 1. Service level 1 is reached. Display shows: 1_ _ _.



                         10.1.1      Retrieval of least popular discs (flops), level 1 button 0

                                     1.   Press selection button 0 once.
                                          # At first the least played CD is shown. The last two digits are simply a code confirming the
                                             least played status. The display shows alternately the disc number and the number of plays
                                             e.g.:




                                                                        CD no. 66 played twice

                                          # If the counter shows 0 0 0 0, this means the disc has not been played. Press selection but-
                                            ton 0 to continue the process for the second least played disc, and so on. At first the CD
                                            with the lowest number of plays will be displayed. Press button 0 again, the display shows
                                            the CD with the second lowest number of plays etc. If the calculation needs a little longer a
                                            ‘1’ scrolls starting from RH. digit over the display.

                                     2.   To cancel the procedure press selection button R.




                                38                                                                                           PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                      Operator data




10.1.2      Top Tunes, level 1 button 1
            Press selection button 1 once.

            The display shows alternately the number of the most played CD and the number of plays. For ex-
            ample:




                                              CD no. 3 played 53 times




                                                                                                                      OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
            Only 63 selections per CD can be stored in the memory. If a CD has been played more than 63 ti-
            mes all the other values will be decreased by 1. The displayed values are only relative.

            Press selection button 1 to continue the process for the second most played CD, and so on.

            The most frequently played track will also be displayed as HIT OF THE HOUSE in normal operating
            mode.




10.1.3      Cash box contents, level 1 button 2

            1.   Press selection button 2 once. Digital display shows the cash box contents in basic units; basic
                 units being the value of the lowest coin.

            2.   To cancel the procedure press selection button R.


10.1.4      Total number of plays, level 1 button 3

            1.   Press selection button 3 once. Display shows the total number of plays since last reset (maxi-
                 mum 9999).

            2.   To cancel the procedure press selection button R.



10.1.5      CLEAR ALL counters (reset to 0 0 0 0), level 1 button 3 + reset

            1.   Press selection button 3 - hold - and press selection button R (reset).
                 # The counters belonging to the buttons 0 to 3 (least popular disc, most popular disc, cash
                    box and total plays) are cleared and reset to 0 0 0 0.
                 # After leaving the service program the jukebox initializes itself, du-
                    ring this procedure the compartments in the magazines will be
                    counted. At the end of the initialization the display should show
                    6161 for a short time. If lower numbers are displayed not all com-
                    partments have been detected correctly. The sequence of top
                    discs is for the time being 01, 02, 03, 04 etc.                      LH magazine
                                                                                                     RH magazine

            2.   To exit the service program first set service switch to OFF and then press the LT button.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                           39
                         Operator data




                         10.1.6      Memory of not playable CDs, level 1 button 6
                                     Careful handling of the CDs does not completely exclude that CDs may be damaged in different
                                     ways. Possibly the player would interrupt this CD at each selection. The SCC provides a watch dog
                                     function which finds and memorizes these difficulties to play.

                                     The SCC unit can store the numbers of up to six not playable CDs. Once a CD is registered every
                                     new try will be counted. So it is possible to find out defective discs and exchange these for new
                                     ones.

                                     1.   Press selection button 6, the display shows flashing:
                                          # 1 means first defective CD
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS




                                          then e.g.

                                          # A = CD number
                                          # B = NUMBER of times the CD was not playable or interrupted

                                     2.   Press selection button 6 to display the next not playable CD, etc. After
                                          displaying the 6th not playable CD and pressing selection button 6 again             A
                                          the display starts with the first one again.                                               B


                                     3.   To CLEAR this memory press selection button 6 - hold - and press selection button R.

                                     4.   To exit the service program, first set service switch to OFF and then press LT button.




                              40                                                                               PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                                                                                     Verification of power voltage




11          Amplifier F91
            The amplifier F91 is the version with higher power out-
            put (2 x 170 W rms.). Equipped with protection and                                                             Treble
                                                                                                                                                        Tone
                                                                                                                                                                                 4
                                                                                                                                                                                 2
                                                                                                                                                                                 1
                                                                                                                                                                                 4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Low Level


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Input CD
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    R

                                                                                                                                                                                             L              R


            watch dog functions described below. The BGM adap-                                                            Bass
                                                                                                                        P10
                                                                                                                        Remote
                                                                                                                                     off                           on
                                                                                                                                                                                 2
                                                                                                                                                                                 1
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Clipping

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    L




            ter (to attenuate the volume in BGM mode) is integra-                                                                                                                                                                                 0039155
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Input Tape
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    R



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    L


            ted. The amplifier is equipped with an automatic                                                            P10
                                                                                                                        Remote

                                                                                                                              Stereo
                                                                                                                                        CD
                                                                                                                                                                 Mode
                                                                                                                                                                          Tape
                                                                                                                                                                          2-Kanal                                                                                                           Mic.-Kit


            volume control (AVC) to level out different recording                                                                                                Input

                                                                                                                                                                 Volume
                                                                                                                                                                                        32
                                                                                                                                                                                        16              R                                                  R


            levels.
                                                                                                                                                                                         8
                                                                                                                                       R
                                                                                                                                                                                         4                                                       BGM Level
                                                                                                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                                                                                                         1                                                                                                                          R
                                                                                                                        BGM                                                                             L
                                                                                          P4                                                                                            32                                                                 L
                                                                                                                                                                                        16                                                                                                              Line Out
                                                                                                                                                                                         8
                                                                                                                                        L                                                                                                                                                                           L
                                                                                                                                                                                         4
                                                                                                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                                                                                                         1


            In 2-channel mode it is possible to control both chan-                                                                                        off             on




            nels separately with the IR-remote control.                                                                                                                                   Verstärker-Sicherungen / Amplifier Fuses                                                   240   Netzspannung
                                                                                                                                                                                             210V - 240V                                    100V - 117V                              230     50/60 Hz
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     220
                                                                                                                                                                                     Si 1/Si 301 Si 102/Si 103 Si 1/Si 301                                Si 102/Si 103              210   Mains Voltage
                                                                                                                                                                                     Si 2/Si 302 Si 100/Si 101 Si 2/Si 302                                Si 100/Si 101              117    50/60 cps


            You can also make selections with the optional infra-                                                                                                                       MT 4A      T 3,15A       T 5A                                       T 3A                     100

                                                                                                                                                                                     Zur Beachtung Nur Sicherungen mit gleicher Größe und
                                                                                                                                                                                     gleichem Wert verwenden um Schäden zu vermeiden.


            red remote control.                                                                                                                                                      Caution: To reduce the risk of fire replace only with
                                                                                                                                                                                     same type and rating fuses.


                                                                                                                                                                                     Achtung!
                                                                                                                                                                                     Vor Abnahme der Kappe den Netzstecker
                                                                                                                                                                                     ziehen!                                                                                       Leuchtstofflampen/
                                                                                                                                                                                     Attention!                                                                                    Flourescent Lamps
                                                                                                                                                                                     Pull power plug before opening protective                                                        230V / 117V
                                                                                                                                                                                     lid!




11.1        Verification of power voltage

            ATTENTION! Always remove power plug before opening transformer cover plate. Never
            attempt any intervention to these parts unless qualified.


            The power voltage setting is on the cover plate of the
            F91 transformer. Machines for USA are set to 117 V.
                                                                                                       Verstärker-Sicherungen / Amplifier Fuses
            Jukeboxes „UNI-Pack“ are shipped in 230 V setting.                                               210V - 240V                                                                         100V - 117V
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            240
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            230
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            220
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Netzspannung
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     50/60 Hz

                                                                                       Si 1/Si 301 Si 102/Si 103 Si 1/Si 301                                                                                          Si 102/Si 103                                         210    Mains Voltage
            This is marked on the machine label inside of the                          Si 2/Si 302 Si 100/Si 101 Si 2/Si 302
                                                                                          MT 4A      T 3,15A       T 5A
                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Si 100/Si 101
                                                                                                                                                                                                                        T 3A
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            117
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            100
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    50/60 cps



            door. If the voltage setting is not clear the transformer




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
                                                                                       Zur Beachtung Nur Sicherungen mit gleicher Größe und
                                                                                       gleichem Wert verwenden um Schäden zu vermeiden.
                                                                                       Caution: To reduce the risk of fire replace only with                                                                                                                              Netzsicherung/

            cover plate has to be removed.                                             same type and rating fuses.                                                                                                                                                        Mains Fuse
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          210-240V - T3,15A
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          100-117V - T8A

                                                                                       Achtung!
                                                                                       Vor Abnahme der Kappe den Netzstecker

            The mains fuse (T3,15 A, res. T8 A for 117V) is loca-                      ziehen!
                                                                                       Attention!
                                                                                       Pull power plug before opening protective
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Leuchtstofflampen/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Flourescent Lamps
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             230V / 117V
                                                                                       lid!
            ted near the RH side of the cover plate.
                                                                          Loosen the 4 screws to remove cover plate
            The position of the two plug connectors on the trans-        (small arrows)
            former terminals 1 to 9 (primary side) indicates the
            current voltage setting. The following combinations are possible:

            240V = 1 - 9

            230V = 1 - 8

            220V = 2 - 9

            210V = 2 - 8

            117V = 1 - 6

            100V = 2 - 6

            Never connect the fluorescent supply to other                  to amplifier


            contacts.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              from mains




            If you intend to change the power voltage to a higher               br/r                                                                                                                                                                                          r
                                                                                           10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
                                                                                                                                    Mains voltage-Netzspannung




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       br
                                                                                                                                                                                    = 2- 4

                                                                                                                                                                                                                Deutsche Wurlitzer GmbH

                                                                                                                                                                                                                nach VDE 0551 50 / 60Hz




            voltage (e.g. from 117V to 230V) it is recommended to               or/y
                                                                                                                                                                                                                Transformator 0039402




                                                                                gn/bl
                                                                                                                                                                       240V = 1 - 9
                                                                                                                                                                       230V = 1 - 8
                                                                                                                                                                       220V = 2 - 9
                                                                                                                                                                       210V = 2 - 8

                                                                                                                                                                       100V = 2 - 6
                                                                                                                                                                       117V = 1 - 6

                                                                                                                                                                 Temperaturwächter




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           1 - 8 = 230V
            use a subtransformer for the flourescent lamps or              bk   vi/gy
                                                                                wt/bk
                                                                                                                                                                 thermalfuse




            change the ballast according to the used voltage (e.g.              br/r
                                                                                or/y                                                                                                                                                                                          bk
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              gy
            for 230V).                                                          gn/bl


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             to flourescent lamps


            The power consumption in standby is approx. 146W.
            With max. volume it is approx. 540W.



PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         41
                       Position of fuses and plug connectors on the power amp board




                       11.2        Position of fuses and plug connectors on the power amp board

                                   WARNING! A voltage of approx. +60V res. - 60V applies to the fuse terminals also a certain time af-
                                   ter power off. Change the fuses with caution !


                                   Usually the jukeboxes are fitted with fuses of DIN 41571 (5x20 mm) slow blow or medium blow. Slow
                                   blow fuses of DIN standard bear the letter T (T = “Träge”) e.g. T 4/250 means T = slow blow, 4
                                   amps, 250 V maximum operating voltage. Which fuses have to be used is printed on the power
                                   transformer cover. Fast blow fuses (F = Flink) are unsuitable for the jukebox.

                                   The fuse holders on the amplifier P.C.B. are capable to hold also fuses of 6x32 mm size.


                                   Position of the plug connectors
                                   P12 - jukebox speakers

                                   P 3 - bubble tubes

                                   P16 - power transformer
                                                                                                                         Si1           Si301
                                   P 4 - CD sub transformer, CD player                                                   Si2           Si302
                                                                                                                                     Si102          Si103
                                   P 9 - mechanism, Selection and Credit Computer                                                    Si100          Si101

                                   P 6 - option, coin interface                                                        P12    P16    P9    P6A
                                                                                                            terminal for
                                                                                                            external       P3     P4    P6    P7
                                   P6A - option                                                             speakers
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                   P 7 - service



                                   Fuse                                               Failure
                                   Main fuse T 3,15,res. T8 A for 110/117 V.          No illumination, machine completely dead.
                                   Fuse Si1: T4A (T5A) +70V= L.H. channel             No sound in the L.H. channel. Speaker relay is not activated,
                                   power stage                                        green LED does not light.
                                   Fuse Si2: T4A (T5A) -70V= L.H. channel
                                   power stage
                                   Fuse Si301: T4A (T5A) +70V= R.H. ch. power         No sound in the R.H. channel. Speaker relay is not activated,
                                   stage                                              green LED does not light.
                                   Fuse Si302: T4A (T5A) -70V= R.H. ch. power
                                   stage
                                   Fuse Si100: T3,15A (T3A) supply -30 V=             The jukebox operates normal. The CD2 mechanism does not
                                                                                      use this voltage.
                                   Fuse Si101: T3,15A (T3A) supply +30 V=             No initialisation run after power ON. Display working.
                                                                                      No function.
                                   Fuse Si102: T3,15A (T3A) supply +12 V=             SCC unit dead - digital display dark (except red LED M still
                                                                                      lighting up on coin insertion).
                                                                                      The LEDs K and Z on the SCC unit are dark. No initialisation
                                                                                      run after power ON.
                                   Fuse Si103: T3,15A (T3A) supply 30V ~              The digital digit on the CD-control is dark. Power supply for CD
                                                                                      player and control unit is interrupted. Credit circuit via LED M
                                                                                      is interrupted. If credits are still in memory or free play is pro-
                                                                                      grammed, a CD will placed on turntable but is not spinning. Af-
                                                                                      ter about one minute the CD is taken back..
                                                                                      If no credits in memory, no CD will be taken to turntable, the
                                                                                      display is flashing.




                              42                                                                                          PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                The first power ON




11.3        The first power ON
            The mains switch is located at the bottom left hand rear                                                                                                                                   Low Level LED
            side of the jukebox. In position ‘I’ jukebox and amplifier
            are switched on. The amplifier is now in STANDBY                                                                                                                  Tone
                                                                                                                                                                                                    4
                                                                                                                                                               Treble                                                           Low Level
            MODE:
                                                                                                                                                                                                    2                                                                      R
                                                                                                                                                                                                    1
                                                                                                                                                                                                    4        L              R                                 Input CD
                                                                                                                                                                                                    2
                                                                                                                                                              Bass                                                                                                         L
                                                                                                                                                                                                    1
                                                                                                                                                            P10         off           on                         Clipping
                                                                                                                                                            Remote

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Amplifier F91                           R
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    0039155
            The yellow ‘Low Level LED’ lights.                                                                                                              P10
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Input Tape

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           L


                                                                                                                                                            Remote                  Mode
                                                                                                                                                                        CD                   Tape
                                                                                                                                                                  Stereo                     2-Kanal                                               Mic.-Kit
                                                                                                                                                                                    Input


            The ‘Low Level’ circuit detects low music parts and pau-                                                                                                                Volume
                                                                                                                                                                                                        32
                                                                                                                                                                                                        16
                                                                                                                                                                                                         8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            R        R
                                                                                                                                                                        R


            ses. It effects the AVC circuit not to raise the audio level
                                                                                                                                                                                                         4                         BGM Level
                                                                                                                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                                                                                                                         1                                                                 R
                                                                                                                                                            BGM                                                             L
                                                                                                                                                       P4                                               32                           L
                                                                                                                                                                                                        16                                                    Line Out



            in music pauses. So disturbing noises will not be heard.
                                                                                                                                                                                                         8
                                                                                                                                                                        L                                                                                                  L
                                                                                                                                                                                                         4
                                                                                                                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                                                                                                                         1
                                                                                                                                                                              off            on



            This LED may light for short times during play.

            The yellow ‘Mute LED’ lights (on the power amp board,
            only visible after lifting up the pre amp board). It indicates                                                                             MUTE-LED
            that the amplifier is muted.
                                                                                                                                                                                                            Power stage P.C.B.
            To avoid power on and other noises, the amplifier output
            will be switched on only during play.




11.4        Pre-settings for volume, bass, treble
            After power on of the jukebox or after pressing the button ‘preset’ the levels of volume, bass and




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
            treble will be set to basic values. These values can be set with different binary DIP switch combinati-
            ons. The switches are located on the amplifier pre amp board. You can find the recommended set-
            tings on the amplifier cover.


                                           1. Tone preset                             2. Two red                    3. Low level
                                              DIP switches                               clipping LEDs                 LED, yellow




                                                             Tone
                                              Treble                              4                                    Low Level
                                                                                  2                                                                                                                     R
                                                                                  1
                                                                                  4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                4. CD input
              14. Remote control                                                  2
                                                                                            L              R                                                                  Input CD
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   terminals
                                              Bass
                  terminals                                                       1                                                                                                                     L
                                           P10         off           on                         Clipping
                                           Remote                                                                                      Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                        0039155
              13. Mode selector                                                                                                                                                                         R
                 stereo / 2-channel                                                                                                                                                                                             5. tape / magn. pick up
                                                                                                                                                                              Input Tape
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   input terminals
                                                                                                                                                                                                        L

                                           P10
                                           Remote                  Mode
                                                 Stereo                     2-Kanal
                                                     CD                     Tape                                                                        Mic.-Kit
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                6. mike kit socket
                                                                   Input

                                                                   Volume
              12. Input selector                                                       32
                                                                                       16              R                           R
                  CD / tape                                                             8
                                                       R
                                                                                        4       Gain                    BGM Level
                                                                                        2
                                                                                        1                                                                                                               R
                                           BGM                                                         L
                                      P4                                               32                                          L
                                                                                       16                                                                                       Line Out                                        7. line output
                                                       L
                                                                                        8
                                                                                                                                                                                                        L                          terminals
              11. BGM active                                                            4
                                                                                        2
                  indicator                                                             1
                  LED yellow                                 off            on




              10. Volume preset
                  DIP switches                                                                                 9. Gain pre pots                        8. BGM level pots




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                                                                 43
                       Pre-settings for volume, bass, treble




                       11.4.1       Pre-settings for volume
                                    You can set the basic values for volume in 63 steps
                                    (to 2dB) from no up to maximum volume.
                                                                                                                                                                                             Tone
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   4
                                                                                                                                                                              Treble                                                                   Low Level
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   2                                                                                                R
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   4           L              R                                                        Input CD
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   2
                                                                                                                                                                             Bass                                                                                                                                   L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                   1
                                                                                                                                                                           P10         off           on                            Clipping
                                                                                                                                                                           Remote
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Amplifier F91
                                    On the amplifier front cover you can find 6 DIP-swit-                                                                                                                                                                      0039155
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Input Tape
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    R



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    L




                                    ches (preset value) for each channel. These switches
                                                                                                                                                                           P10
                                                                                                                                                                           Remote                  Mode
                                                                                                                                                                                       CD                   Tape
                                                                                                                                                                                 Stereo                     2-Kanal                                                                         Mic.-Kit
                                                                                                                                                                                                   Input



                                    have different values (1, 2 ... to 32). If you add all the                                                                                         R
                                                                                                                                                                                                   Volume
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          32
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          16
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          R                        R

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               BGM Level


                                    values of the switches in position “ON” you will get
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           2
                                                                                                                                                                           BGM                                             1                                                                                        R
                                                                                                                                                                      P4                                                  32              L                        L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                          16                                                                           Line Out
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           8
                                                                                                                                                                                       L                                                                                                                            L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           4



                                    the value for the preset volume.                                                                                                                         off            on
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           1




                                    The recommended factory settings are printed on the                                                                                                                                     Verstärker-Sicherungen / Amplifier Fuses
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               210V - 240V               100V - 117V
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     240
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     230
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     220
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Netzspannung
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             50/60 Hz                     32
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Si 1/Si 301 Si 102/Si 103 Si 1/Si 301
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Si 2/Si 302 Si 100/Si 101 Si 2/Si 302
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Si 102/Si 103
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Si 100/Si 101
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     210
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     117
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Mains Voltage
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            50/60 cps                     16
                                    amplifier cover (32).                                                                                                                                                                MT 4A       T 3,15A       T 5A              T 3A

                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Zur Beachtung Nur Sicherungen mit gleicher Größe und
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       gleichem Wert verwenden um Schäden zu vermeiden.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     100


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Caution: To reduce the risk of fire replace only with
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       same type and rating fuses.                                                                         4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           2
                                    If you change the DIP-switch settings while the juke-
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Achtung!
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Vor Abnahme der Kappe den Netzstecker
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       ziehen!
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Attention!
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Pull power plug before opening protective
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Leuchtstofflampen/
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Flourescent Lamps
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      230V / 117V
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           1
                                    box is operating, new settings will be taken over after                                                                                                                                                                                                                               32
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       lid!




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          16
                                    having pressed the button ‘PRESET’ at the control ter-                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           4
                                    minal or on IR remote or after power on.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           1

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         DIP switches for
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         volume pre-settings


                                    WARNING! If all switches are in position OFF no volume, if all switches are in position ON, the ma-
                                    ximum volume appears at power on !




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        100%
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                                                                                                      Preset volume level

                                           0%

                                               32
                                               16
                                       value




                                                8
                                                4
                                                2
                                                1
                                                    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

                                           low             - switch position ON                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          high



                       11.4.2       Pre-settings for bass and treble
                                    Like wise the values for bass and treble can be set.                                                                                                                                                                                       recommended
                                    However for both channels together.                                                                                                                      DIP switches                                                                         settigs




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                                                                            treble
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         1
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         4
                                                                                                                                                            bass
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         1
                                                                                                                                                                                                      off                                     on




                             44                                                                                                                                                                                            PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                              Speaker connections




            Three DIP-switches with the values 1, 2, 4 are provided                                       Preset bass or treble level
            for each bass and treble. You can choose 7 different                                      -9dB              0dB                +12dB
            steps of 3dB from minimum (-9dB) to maximum
                                                                                                                        linear
            (+12dB). Adding value of all switches set to "ON" gets                                                                              max.
                                                                                                                                                treble /
            the total value.                                                                                                                    bass
                                                                                           min.
                                                                                           treble /
            The 0dB - 'linear' position of these switches is printed as                    bass
            recommended factory setting on the amplifier cover.

            NOTE: If you change the DIP-switch settings while the
                                                                                                4




                                                                                   value
            jukebox operates, new settings will be taken over after
            having pressed the button ‘PRESET’ at the control ter-                              2
            minal or after a power off and on of the box.
                                                                                                1
                                                                                                          0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
                                                                                                               - switch position ON


11.5        Speaker connections
            The speaker connector terminals are situated in-
            side and on the back side of the jukebox.                                L
                                                                                                                              R.H.                 8
                                                                                                                              terminal      +
                                                                                                                                                   100W
                                                                                                                                                   or 4
            To attain a good sound of the jukebox, take care          +/- Volume                                                            _      200W

            when connecting the speakers. Pay attention to                                      2K                      monitor
                                                                                                                        speaker
            the following requirements:                                              R
                                                                                                                              L.H.                 8
                                                                                                                                            +
                                                                                                                              terminal             100W
            The minimum impedance is 4Ω per channel!                                                                                               or 4
                                                                                                                                            _      200W




                                                                                                                                                           FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
            The power output of each channel at a load of 4Ω
            is 170 W rms, i.e. the min. power consumption of a
            4Ω speaker set should be 200 Watts.

            All speakers must be connected with the correct polarity.

            The speakers may be operated as desired in the
                                                                                                               power amp board
            mode STEREO or 2-CHANNEL .

            In STEREO mode the sound reproduction is al-
            ways stereo.
                                                                           output
            In 2-CHANNEL mode it is possible to control the                relays
            volume of both channels independent to each
            other. It allows to reproduce the sound in a second
            room with different volume. The sound reproduc-
            tion in this mode is only mono.
                                                                                                      -    -
                                                                                                          + +
            In 2-CHANNEL mode the volume of the speakers                                                                         screwing terminals
            connected to the normal terminals (R.H. channel)                                                                     on the amplifier
            can be controlled with the mode ‘VOLUME’ and the                               L                        R
            volume of speakers connected to the screwing ter-                              +                        +
            minals on the amplifier (LH channel) with the mode
            ‘BALANCE’. The preset volume can be set separately.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                            45
                       Speaker connections




                       11.5.1     The operating mode STEREO
                                  For normal operation the jukebox is set to the STEREO mode. Both amplifier switches, the mode
                                  switch and the slide switch S1 on the power amplifier board are set to position STEREO.




                                                                                 Tone
                                                                                               4                        Low Level
                                                                  Treble
                                                                                               2                                                                                R
                                                                                               1
                                                                                               4     L              R                                              Input CD
                                                                                               2
                                                                 Bass                                                                                                           L
                                                                                               1
                                                               P10         off          on               Clipping
                                                               Remote                                                                   Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                         0039155

                                                                                             Mode                                                                  Input Tape
                                                                                                                                                                                R



                                                                                                                                                                                L
                                                                                                                                                                                    position
                                                              Stereo
                                                               P10
                                                               Remote

                                                                 CD
                                                                                                         2-Kanal
                                                                                                         Tape
                                                                                                                                                                                    STEREO
                                                                                                                                                        Mic.-Kit


                                                                                             Input
                                                                                                                R                   R

                                                                                             Volume
                                                                                                                                                                                                      S1
                                                                                                                               BGM Level

                                                               BGM                                                                                                              R
                                                         P4                                                     L                   L
                                                                                                                                                                   Line Out

                                                                                                                                                                                L
                                                                                                                                                                                                       S1

                                                                     R

                                                                                                                                                                                                            P12
                                       mode switch



                                                                                                                                                                                               2-channel / Stereo
                                                                                                                                                                                                 slide switch S1



                                  Example1:
                                  Two 8Ω speaker connected in parallel                                                                                                L
                                                                                                                                                                                                              R.H.
                                                                                                                                                                                                            terminal     +          +
                                  per channel                                                                                                                                                                                8          8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                             100W       100W
                                                                                                                                            +/- Volume                                                                   _          _

                                                                                                                                                                                     2K             monitor
                                                                                                                                                                                                    speaker
                                                                                                                                                                     R
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                                                                                                                                                                                              L.H.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         +          +
                                                                                                                                                                                                            terminal
                                                                                                                                                                                                                             8          8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                             100W       100W
                                                                                                                                                        2-channel / Stereo                                               _          _
                                                                                                                                                          slide switch S1



                                  Example 2:
                                  2 times 4 Ω speaker connected in se-                                                                                                L                                                             +
                                                                                                                                                                                                              R.H.                      4
                                  ries and in parallel with one 8Ω spea-                                                                                                                                    terminal     +
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    _   50W
                                                                                                                                                                                                                             8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    +
                                  ker                                                                                                       +/- Volume                                                                   _
                                                                                                                                                                                                                             100W
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    _   50W

                                                                                                                                                                                     2K             monitor
                                                                                                                                                                                                    speaker
                                                                                                                                                                     R                                                              +
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        4
                                                                                                                                                                                                              L.H.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         +              50W
                                                                                                                                                                                                            terminal                _
                                                                                                                                                                                                                             8
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    +
                                                                                                                                                        2-channel / Stereo                                                   100W
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         _
                                                                                                                                                          slide switch S1                                                           _   50W




                            46                                                                                                                                                                                PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                         Connecting external speakers in operating mode 2-CHANNEL




11.6        Connecting external speakers in operating mode 2-CHANNEL
            For 2-CHANNEL operation both amplifier switches, the                                                                         Tone
                                                                                                                                                               4


            mode switch and the slide switch S1 on the power am-
                                                                                                                          Treble                                                               Low Level
                                                                                                                                                               2                                                                                           R
                                                                                                                                                               1
                                                                                                                                                               4        L              R                                                      Input CD
                                                                                                                                                               2
                                                                                                                          Bass                                                                                                                             L
                                                                                                                                                               1



            plifier board are set to position 2-CHANNEL.
                                                                                                                      P10          off           on                         Clipping
                                                                                                                      Remote                                                                                   Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                                                                                                0039155
                                                                                                                                                Mode                                                                                                       R


                                                                                                                 Stereo                                                 2-Kanal                                                               Input Tape

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           L


                                                                                                                    CDP10
                                                                                                                                                                        Tape
            As the following examples show, in the 2-CHANNEL                                                          Remote

                                                                                                                             Stereo
                                                                                                                                   CD
                                                                                                                                               Mode



                                                                                                                                                 Input
                                                                                                                                               Input
                                                                                                                                                        Tape
                                                                                                                                                        2-Kanal                                                                    Mic.-Kit




            mode it is possible to connect different loads to each                                                                 R
                                                                                                                                               Volume


                                                                                                                                                 Volume
                                                                                                                                                                   32
                                                                                                                                                                   16
                                                                                                                                                                    8
                                                                                                                                                                                   R                       R

                                                                                                                                                                    4                                    BGM Level

            amplifier output. Take care that the min. impedance is                                               P4
                                                                                                                      BGM
                                                                                                                                                                    2
                                                                                                                                                                    1
                                                                                                                                                                   32
                                                                                                                                                                   16
                                                                                                                                                                    8
                                                                                                                                                                                   L                       L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Line Out
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           R



                                                                                                                                   L                                                                                                                       L


            4Ω per channel.
                                                                                                                                                                    4
                                                                                                                                                                    2
                                                                                                                      R                  off            on
                                                                                                                                                                    1




                                                                                                                                 mode switch

                                                                                                                                                  2-channel / stereo
                                                                                                                                                    slide switch S1
                                                                                                                                                  in position 2-channel




                                                                                                                                 S1        S1




                                                                                                                                                        P12




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
            Example 1:
            1st room a speaker of 4Ω                                             L                                                                                                                                             +
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              2
            200W, 2nd room 4speaker of                             +/- Balance
                                                                                                                       screwing terminals                                                                                      _              30W
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               +
            2Ω 30W connected in series                                                                                                                                                                                                        2
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              30W
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               _
                                                                   +/- Volume                                                                                                                                                  +
                                                                                      2K                     monitor                                                                                                                          2
                                                                                                             speaker
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               _              30W
                                                                                 R                                                                                                                                             +
                                                                                                                       normal                                                                                                                 2
                                                                                                                                                                                           +                                                  30W
                                                                                                                       terminal                                                                                                _
                                                                                                                                                                                                 4
                                                                                                                                                                                                200W
                                                                                    stereo                                                                                                 _

                                                                                 slide switch


            Example 2:
            1st room a speaker of 4Ω                         L
            200W, 2nd room 4speaker of         +/- Balance
                                                                                                     screwing
                                                                                                     terminals
                                                                                                                      +
                                                                                                                                         16
                                                                                                                                                                   +
                                                                                                                                                                                       16
                                                                                                                                                                                                     +
                                                                                                                                                                                                                16
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               +
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              16
                                                                                                                                         50W                                           50W                      50W                           50W
            16Ω 50W connected in parallel                                                                             _                                            _                                 _                         _

                                               +/- Volume
                                                                        2K                 monitor
                                                                                           speaker
                                                             R
                                                                                                normal                                    +
                                                                                                terminal
                                                                                                                                                               4
                                                                 2-channel /                                                                                   200W
                                                                                                                                          _
                                                                 stereo slide
                                                                 switch




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                                          47
                       BGM mode - volume attenuation




                       11.7        BGM mode - volume attenuation
                                   In the BGM (BackGround Music) mode the vo-
                                   lume will be reduced by a certain factor.                    Treble
                                                                                                             Tone
                                                                                                                                4
                                                                                                                                2
                                                                                                                                                                 Low Level                                               R
                                                                                                                                1
                                                                                                                                4
                                                                                                                                2
                                                                                                                                          L          R                                                       Input CD
                                                                                                Bass                                                                                                                     L
                                                                                                                                1

                                   This function is controlled by the signal „BGM“            P10
                                                                                              Remote
                                                                                                     off             on
                                                                                                                                      Clipping                                   Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                                                                  0039155
                                   pin 1 plug brown from the SCC unit. The active                                                                                                                           Input Tape
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         R



                                   BGM mode is displayed with a yellow LED near               P10
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         L

                                                                                              Remote
                                   plug P4. In this mode the volume of the normal                 Stereo
                                                                                                     CD
                                                                                                                   Mode
                                                                                                                           2-Kanal
                                                                                                                           Tape                                                                  Mic.-Kit

                                   sound is adjustable by two BGM trim pots in the                                 Input
                                                                                                               Volume
                                                                                                                                     32
                                                                                                                                                         R
                                   center of the pre-amplifier board.                                   R
                                                                                                                                     16
                                                                                                                                      8
                                                                                                                                      4
                                                                                                                                                                             R

                                                                                                                                                                             BGM Level
                                                                                                                                      2
                                                                                                                                      1                                                                                  R
                                                                                         P4                                                              L
                                                                                              BGM                                    32                                      L
                                                                                                                                     16
                                                                                                                                      8
                                                                                                                                                                                                             Line Out
                                                                                                         L                            4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         L
                                                                                                                                      2
                                                                                                                                      1
                                                                                                             off           on




                                                                                        BGM LED                                                                                      BGM trim pots
                                                                                         (yellow)



                       11.8        Automatic volume control (AVC) and clipping stage
                                   The AVC sets CDs with different volume levels
                                                                                                             Tone
                                   to an equal level. The level of CDs with a high             Treble                           4
                                                                                                                                2
                                                                                                                                                                 Low Level                                               R
                                                                                                                                1
                                                                                                                                                                                                             Input CD
                                   level will be reduced, the level of low leveled              Bass
                                                                                                                                4
                                                                                                                                2
                                                                                                                                1
                                                                                                                                          L          R
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         L
                                                                                              P10    off            on
                                   CDs will be increased. This control works rather           Remote                                          Clipping                           Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                                                                  0039155
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         R
                                   slow to save the dynamic range of the track.                                                                                                                             Input Tape
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         L
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                                                                              P10
                                                                                              Remote           Mode

                                   The pre amp gain pots are situated between the                 Stereo
                                                                                                     CD
                                                                                                                           2-Kanal
                                                                                                                           Tape                                                                  Mic.-Kit
                                                                                                               Input
                                   volume pre-set switches and the BGM level trim                              Volume
                                                                                                                                     32
                                                                                                                                                     R                       R
                                   pots. These two pots are factory pre set should                     R
                                                                                                                                     16
                                                                                                                                      8
                                                                                                                                      4
                                                                                                                                                                             BGM Level
                                                                                                                                      2

                                   not be adjusted.                                      P4
                                                                                              BGM
                                                                                                                                      1
                                                                                                                                     32
                                                                                                                                     16
                                                                                                                                                         L                   L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     R

                                                                                                                                      8
                                                                                                                                                                                                             Line Out
                                                                                                        L                             4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     L
                                                                                                                                      2
                                                                                                                                      1
                                                                                                             off           on




                                                                                                                                                              gain pots




                       11.9        Overdrive protection
                                   In case of an overdriven power amp one or both
                                                                                                                                clipping LEDs
                                   red clipping LEDs will light. The clipping circuit
                                   will have an effect on the AVC circuit and the
                                   volume will be reduced. Occasional lightning of                           Tone
                                                                                                                                4
                                                                                                Treble                                                           Low Level                                               R
                                   the clipping LEDs during a loud performance is                                               2
                                                                                                                                1
                                                                                                                                4         L          R                                                       Input CD
                                                                                                                                2                                                                                        L
                                   normal. Continuously lightning of one or both                Bass
                                                                                              P10
                                                                                              Remote
                                                                                                     off             on
                                                                                                                                1

                                                                                                                                      Clipping                                   Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                                                                  0039155
                                   LEDs indicates an overdriven channel and dis-                                                                                                                                         R

                                                                                                                                                                                                            Input Tape
                                   tortion can be heard. It is recommended to re-                                                                                                                                        L

                                                                                              P10
                                   duce the volume.                                           Remote
                                                                                                  Stereo
                                                                                                                   Mode
                                                                                                                           2-Kanal
                                                                                                     CD                    Tape                                                                  Mic.-Kit
                                                                                                                   Input
                                                                                                               Volume
                                   Also speakers with an impedance lower than 4Ω                                                     32
                                                                                                                                     16                  R                   R
                                                                                                                                      8
                                                                                                        R
                                   (in STEREO mode) may cause an overload and            P4
                                                                                                                                      4
                                                                                                                                      2
                                                                                                                                      1
                                                                                                                                                                             BGM Level
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         R
                                                                                              BGM                                    32                  L                   L
                                   the LEDs will light.                                                  L
                                                                                                                                     16
                                                                                                                                      8
                                                                                                                                      4
                                                                                                                                                                                                             Line Out
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         L
                                                                                                                                      2
                                                                                                                                      1
                                                                                                             off           on




                              48                                                                                                                             PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                                                                   Overload protection




11.10       Overload protection
            The power amplifier is provided with an overload pro-
            tection circuit.                                                                             relay check
                                                                                                         LEDs (green)
            While the CD is playing two green LEDs indicate that
            the speaker output relays are activated. If one of these
            LEDs is dark during play and no sound appears an
            overload of the power amp stage has occurred, which
            is for example caused by a short circuit in the connec-
            tion wires to the external speakers.

            An additional internal watch dog circuit checks that the                                                                        speakers relay
            audio signal contains no DC Voltages and no high
            sublow frequencies. It also indicates that the load limi-
            tation cut off has been reached. If only one test is not
            successful the relays will be switched off.


11.11       Tape input
            Additional to the CD input a
                                                                         Tone
            tape input with a higher input                  Treble                        4
                                                                                          2
                                                                                          1
                                                                                                                       Low Level                                             R
                                                                                                                                                                  Input CD
            sensivity is provided. As an op-                 Bass
                                                                                          4
                                                                                          2
                                                                                          1
                                                                                                    L         R
                                                                                                                                                                             L
                                                           P10    off           on
            tion this input stage may be wi-               Remote                                       Clipping                       Amplifier F91
                                                                                                                                        0039155
                                                                                                                                                                R                     tape
            red as a correcting network to                                                                                                             Input Tape
                                                                                                                                                                L                     input
            work with a magnetic pick up                   P10
                                                           Remote          Mode

            (RIAA).     Set the ‘input’ DIP                    Stereo
                                                              CD              Tape
                                                                                     2-Kanal




                                                                                                                                                                                              FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
                                                                                                                                                       Mic.-Kit
                                                                         Input
            switch to tape position to select                                                  32
                                                                                                               R                   R
                                                                                               16

            the tape input.                                         R                           8
                                                                                                4
                                                                                                2
                                                                                                                                   BGM Level
                                                                                                1                                                                            R
                                                      P4                                                           L
                                                           BGM                                 32                                  L
                                                                                               16
                                                                                                8
                                                                                                                                                                  Line Out
                                                                     L                          4
                                                                                                                                                                             L
                                                                                                2

                                                                    inputoff         on
                                                                                                1




                                                                    switch




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                   49
                       Device description of the amplifier K99




                       12           Amplifier K99

                       12.1         Device description of the amplifier K99
                                    The amplifier K99 is optimised for universal use in Deutsche Wurlitzer GmbH music machines. Great
                                    importance had been attached for an easy handling and stand alone function without the S&CC unit.
                                    The output power is designed for the typical used internal speakers at Deutsche Wurlitzer GmbH
                                    machines, under normal circumstances reaching an impeccable volume level.

                                    Standard equipment:
                                    !   Hybrid power stage technology, short circuit and over temperature protected
                                    !   2 inputs (stereo): CD and tape
                                    !   1 mono input for optional micro kit
                                    !   Volume control with 2 pots onboard
                                    !   Volume control possible with pots and / or IR at the same time. The pot used at last determines
                                        the volume.
                                    !   Bass and treble control with pots
                                    !   BGM volume reduction, controllable with pot
                                    !   Automatic volume correction (AVC), switchable
                                    !   2 channel operation switchable, RH = internal speakers, LH = external speakers
                                    !   Status display with 7segment display
                                    !   Independent controllable RCA output to connect external amplifiers
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                    !   For use with the old and the new changer mechanism.

                                    Optional:
                                    !   Remote control of F91 with large distance range. Functions: track selection / volume chan. 1 / vo-
                                        lume chan. 2 / mute (toggle) / cancel
                                    !   Volume control with two pots in the wired remote box accessible from the machine rear wall, or
                                        external. Cancel button and mute button (with toggle function).
                                    !   Output transformer (like F91)
                                    !   Microphone kit


                       12.2         Technical data

                                                                    General                              USA / Canada
                                    Supply                          100v - 240v                          117v
                                    Mains frequency                 50cps - 60cps                        60cps
                                    Input voltage CD                typ. 1.2v                            typ. 1.2v
                                    Input voltage tape              300mv                                300mv
                                    Output voltage pre amplifier    <=1veff                              <=1veff
                                    Output power                    2 x 55w (rms)                        2 x 55w (rms)
                                    Output impedance                min. 4ohm                            min. 4ohm
                                    Transmission range              20cps - 20,000cps                    20cps - 20,000cps
                                    Distorsion factor               < 1%                                 < 1%
                                    Noise level                     depending on the adjusted volume of the jukebox loudness levels of more
                                                                    than 70 dB(A) can be reached.



                              50                                                                                     PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                Verification of power voltage




12.3        Verification of power voltage
            The voltage settings are marked on
            the cover plate of the mains transfor-               Achtung
                                                                 Vor A nahme   er       appe   en Netzstecker                   240   Netzspannung
            mer. Machines for USA are set to                     ziehen
                                                                   arning
                                                                                                                                230
                                                                                                                                220
                                                                                                                                       50/60 Hz

            117V. They have a special transfor-                  Shock hazar        o   not open                                210
                                                                                                                                117
                                                                                                                                      Mains Voltage
                                                                                                                                       50/60 cps
            mer according to UL standard which                                                                                  100




                                                                                                                                                      Verstärker
            is not adjustable. Jukeboxes “UNI-                                                       ur Beachtung Nur Sicherungen mit




                                                                                                                                                      Amplifier
                                                                       Netzsicherung                           ß
                                                                                                    gleicher röe  un gleichem    ert
                                                              Schein-  Mains Fuse                    erwen en, um Schä en zu ermei en
            Pack” are shipped in 230V setting.                annehmer 210-240V - T 4A
                                                                                                     aution  To re uce the risk of fire
                                                              Bill-    100-117V - F 6A
            This is marked on the machine label               acceptor
                                                                                                    replace onl with same t p an rating fuses


            inside of the door. If the voltage set-                                                Externer Hauptschalter
                                                                                                   External Mains switch
            ting is not clear the transformer cover                                                Leuchtstofflampen
            plate has to be removed. The mains                                                     Fluorescent Lamps
                                                                                                     230V / 117V
            fuse (T3.15A) is located on the left
            bottom side inbetween the three ter-
                                                                      Netzsicherung/
            minals for the bill acceptor, the exter-                  Mains Fuse
            nal mains switch and the fluorescent                      210-240V - T3,15A
                                                                      100-117V - F6A
            lamps.

            Loosen the four screws to remove the
            cover plate (small arrows).

            ATTENTION! Always remove power plug before opening transformer cover plate. Never
            attempt any intervention to these parts unless qualified!


            The position of the two plug connectors on the transformer terminals 1 to 9 (primary side) indicates
            the current voltage setting. The following combinations are possible:




                                                                                                                                                                   FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
            240V = 1 - 9

            230V = 1 - 8

            220V = 2 - 9

            210V = 2 - 8

            117V = 1 - 6

            100V = 2 - 6

            Notice that these settings cannot be
            made on machines produced accor-
            ding to UL standard.

            NOTE: Never connect the fluorescent
            supply to other contact.

            If you intend to change the power vol-                                                    Deutsche Wurlitzer GmbH


            tage for a higher voltage (e.g. from
            117V to 230V) it is better to use a
            subtransformer for the fluorescent
            lamps or change the ballast according
            to the used voltage (e.g. for 230V).




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                  51
                       Position of fuses and plug connectors




                       12.4        Position of fuses and plug connectors
                                   Usually the jukeboxes are fitted
                                   with fuses of DIN 41571 (5x20
                                   mm) slow blow or medium blow.                                        DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                                        REMOVE COVER
                                   Slow blow fuses of DIN standard




                                                                                                                                                                                                                             EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                              Verstärker K 99                           0056041




                                                                                                                                                                                                                              EXTRA INPUT 300mV
                                   bear the letter T (T = ”Träge”) e.g.        1P09     MECHANIK                                              Amplifier K 99 C-UL                       0058484




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           R
                                                                                        MECHANISM

                                   T 4/250 means T = slow blow, 4                                                                                          MONO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  L
                                                                                                                                                         STEREO

                                   amps, 250 V maximum operating               1P06A                                      CAUTION




                                                                                              OPTION

                                                                                                        OPTION
                                                                                                                    TO REDUCETHE RISK
                                                                                                                                              Intern    Extern
                                                                               1P06B                                             CE
                                                                                                                    OF FIRE REPLA ONL
                                                                                                                    WITH SAMETYPE AND
                                                                                                                    RATING FUSE
                                                                                                                                         Y
                                                                                                                                             Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass          Treble     BGM
                                   voltage. Which fuses have to fit in




                                                                                                                                                                                                                             EINGANG CD

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      R
                                                                                                                     SICHERUNG




                                                                                           EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER




                                                                                                                                                                                                                              INPUT CD
                                                                               2LP04
                                                                                                                                  F1 - F4
                                                                                                                     FUSE




                                                                                             EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                                            L
                                   is printed on the power transformer         2P04
                                                                                                                    100-240 V 117 V




                                                                                                 8W / 80 W
                                                                                                                    50Hz/60Hz 60Hz




                                                                                                                                                                                                                             L
                                                                                                                                                      ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                                                    T4A         3,0 AMP                          MUTE
                                   cover. Fast blow fuses (F = Flink)                                                           250 V AC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   MICROPHONE
                                                                                                                                                        AVC             TAPE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    MIKROFON
                                                                                                                                SLOW BLOW           RS232
                                                                               2RP04




                                                                                              R




                                                                                                                                                                                                                   RS 232
                                                                                                                    30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=               MICRO          BGM
                                   are unsuitable for the jukebox.                          2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL
                                                                                                                     AC   AC   AC   DC                       ok.
                                                                                                                                                     SCHALTER / SWITCHES
                                                                                                                                                 AUTO 1 MUTE     AUS/OFF




                                                                                                                                                                                                                   INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                               2P12
                                                                                            STEREO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                   INFRAROT-REGLER
                                                                                                                                               NORMAL 2 RS232




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                R
                                                                                                                                                                 SERVICE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                        AUSGANG
                                                                                                                                                                                                                         OUTPUT
                                                                                                                                              SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL

                                   The fuse holders on the amplifier                    INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER
                                                                                        INTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                                                                                  HIGH 2 AVC
                                                                                                                                               AUS/OFF 3 AVC
                                                                                                                                                                 LOW
                                                                                                                                                                 EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                       L
                                                                                                                                                STEREO 4 MODE    2-KANAL/2CHANNEL


                                   P.C.B. are also capable to hold fu-         1P04     CD-TRAFO
                                                                                                                    F1     F2     F3   F4
                                                                                                                                                    CD 5 INPUT
                                                                                                                                               AUS/OFF 6 BGM
                                                                                                                                                                 TAPE
                                                                                                                                                                 EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                            BGM
                                                                                        CD-TRANSFORMER
                                   ses of 6x32 mm size.                        1P03
                                                                                                                                                                                    ERWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                                     EXTENSION
                                                                                                                                                                                                    FERNREGLER
                                                                                        BUBBLE-TUBES                                                                                              REMOTE-CONTROL



                                   You will find the fuses behind the                                              D
                                                                                                                     NETZTRAFO
                                                                                                                     A
                                                                                                                    TRANSFORMER                                                ECKEL BNEHMEN
                                                                                                                   R C                                                         EMOVE OVER
                                   amplifier cover plate. To remove
                                   the plate first unplug the cable co-
                                   ming from the mains transformer.
                                   Next lose slightly both nuts on top
                                   of the amplifier accessible through the holes in the cover plate (arrows). To remove the plate first
                                   take the bottom side out of its hinges and then the top side.
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                   Connection plan of the plug terminals:
                                     ! 1P09    -      mechanism, SCC unit
                                     ! 1P06A -        option
                                     ! 1P06B -        option
                                     ! 2LP04 -        external speakers, LH
                                     ! 2P04    -      external speakers, ground
                                     ! 2RP04 -        external speakers, RH
                                     ! 2P12    -      Internal speakers
                                     ! 1P04    -      CD sub transformer, CD player
                                     ! 1P03    -      bubble tubes



                                   Fuse                                          Failure
                                   Main fuse T 3,15,res. F6 A for 110/117 V.     No illumination, machine completely dead.
                                   Fuse F1: T4A supply 30V ~                     The digital digit on the CD-control is dark. Power sup-
                                                                                 ply for CD player and control unit is interrupted. Credit
                                                                                 circuit via LED M is interrupted. If credits are still in
                                                                                 memory or free play is programmed; a CD will be
                                                                                 placed on turntable but is not spinning.
                                   Fuse F2: T4A supply 26V ~                     The colour tubes of the One More Time do not rotate,
                                   Fuse F3: T4A supply 26V ~                     the heating of the bubble tubes is off - no bubbles will
                                                                                 appear. Possibly defect of the power stage of the amp-
                                                                                 lifier.
                                   Fuse F4: T4A supply +12 V=                    SCC unit dead - digital display dark (except red LED M
                                                                                 still lighting up on coin insertion). The LEDs K and Z
                                                                                 on the SCC unit are dark. No initialisations run after
                                                                                 power ON. The status display on the amplifier is dark.




                              52                                                                                                                      PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                                                                            The first power ON




12.5        The first power ON
            The mains switch is located at the rear                              DECKEL ABNEHMEN
            side of the amplifier and thus it is on                              REMOVE COVER


            the rear side of the jukebox. For wall-




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                                                                                                       EXTRA INPUT 300mV
                                                                                                                           Verstärker K 99                                0056041
                                                               MECHANIK                                                    Amplifier K 99 C-UL




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    R
                                                                                                                                                                          0058484
            boxes it is possible to connect an ex-             MECHANISM
                                                                                                                                            MONO


            ternal mains switch to the amplifier




                                                                                                                                                                                                                           L
                                                                                                                                           STEREO
                                                                                                   CAUTION




                                                                      OPTION

                                                                                 OPTION
                                                                                             TO REDUCETHE RISK
                                                                                                                           Intern   Extern
            accessible then from the side. In posi-                                                       CE
                                                                                             OF FIRE REPLA ONL
                                                                                             WITH SAMETYPE AND
                                                                                             RATING FUSE
                                                                                                                  Y
                                                                                                                         Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass                Treble    BGM
                                                                                                                                                   MUTE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      EINGANG CD

                                                                                                                                                                                                                               R
                                                                   EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER
                                                                                              SICHERUNG




                                                                                                                                                                                                                       INPUT CD
            tion ‘I’ jukebox and amplifier are swit-                                          F   USE
                                                                                                           F1 - F4




                                                                     EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                    L
                                                                                             100-240 V 117 V
                                                                                                                       AVC




                                                                         8W / 80 W
            ched on.                                                                         50Hz/60Hz 60Hz
                                                                                                                                                                      TAPE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      L
                                                                                                                                     ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                             T4A             3,0 AMP                              MUTE

                                                                                                                    S232
                                                                                                             250 V AC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                            MICROPHONE
                                                                                                                                    AVC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                             MIKROFON
                                                                                                             SLOW BLOW                                   TAPE
                                                                                                                                RS232




                                                                      R




                                                                                                                                                                                                       RS 232
                                                                                             30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=                  MICRO                 BGM

            Up to approx. 1 sec. after power on                    2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL
                                                                                              AC   AC   AC   DC
                                                                                                                     MICRO                        ok.
                                                                                                                                    SCHALTER / SWITCHES
                                                                                                                                                                   BGM
            random segments of the status display




                                                                                                                                                                                                       INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                                                                                                                                                       INFRAROT-REGLER
                                                                   STEREO                                                             1




                                                                                                                                                                                                                    R
                                                                                                                                                   ok.




                                                                                                                                                                                                            AUSGANG
                                                                                                                                      2




                                                                                                                                                                                                             OUTPUT
                                                                                                                                      1

            will light. Followed by displaying the             INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER
                                                               INTERNAL SPEAKER                                            AUS/OFF
                                                                                                                                      2
                                                                                                                                      3   AVC      EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                           L
                                                                                                                            STEREO    4   MODE     2-KANAL/2CHANNEL

            version number of the amplifier soft-                                            F1         F2     F3   F4
                                                                                                                                CD
                                                                                                                           AUS/OFF
                                                                                                                                      5
                                                                                                                                      6
                                                                                                                                          INPUT
                                                                                                                                          BGM
                                                                                                                                                   TAPE
                                                                                                                                                   EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 BGM
                                                               CD-TRAFO
                                                               CD-TRANSFORMER
            ware (1.0 or higher). Then the bottom                                                                                                                    ERWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                      EXTENSION
                                                                                                                                                                                     FERNREGLER
                                                               BUBBLE-TUBES                                                                                                        REMOTE-CONTROL
            segment for “ok.” and the upper seg-
            ment for MUTE will light. The amplifier                                           NETZTRAFO
                                                                                             TRANSFORMER                                                        DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                                                                                                REMOVE COVER
            is now in STANDBY MODE. Depen-
            ding on other enabled options more
            segments may light as well (e.g.
            AVC).


12.6        Volume control
            You can control the volume of the
                                                                                DECKEL ABNEHMEN
            jukebox from different points at the




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
                                                                                REMOVE COVER

            same time:




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                          Verstärker K 99




                                                                                                                                                                                                                  EXTRA INPUT 300mV
                                                               MECHANIK                                                   Amplifier K 99 C-UL




                                                                                                                                                                                                                               R
                                                               MECHANISM
                                                                                                                                            MONO
            !   With the pots Vol. 1 and Vol. 2 on




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      L
                                                                                                                                          STEREO
                                                                                                   CAUTION
                the amplifier.
                                                                     OPTION

                                                                                OPTION




                                                                                            TO REDUCETHE RISK
                                                                                            OF FIRE REPLA ONL
                                                                                                         CE      Y        Intern    Extern
                                                                                            WITH SAMETYPE AND            Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass                Treble    BGM
                                                                                            RATING FUSE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 EINGANG CD

                                                                                                                                                                                                                          R
                                                                                             SICHERUNG
                                                                  EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER




            !   With an optional connectable IR re-




                                                                                                                                                                                                                  INPUT CD
                                                                                                          F1 - F4
                                                                                             F USE
                                                                    EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                   L




                                                                                            100-240V 117 V
                                                                        8W / 80 W




                mote control.                                                               50Hz/60Hz 60Hz




                                                                                                                                                                                                                 L
                                                                                                                                     ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                            T4A              3,0 AMP                              MUTE
                                                                                                             250 V AC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                        MICROPHONE
                                                                                                                                    AVC                  TAPE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                         MIKROFON
                                                                                                             SLOW BLOW
                                                                                                                                RS232
            !   With the pots of the control box at
                                                                     R




                                                                                                                                                                                                    RS 232
                                                                                            30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=                   MICRO                 BGM
                                                                                             AC   AC   AC   DC                              ok.
                                                                   2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL
                the rear side of the jukebox.                                                                                       SCHALTER / SWITCHES
                                                                                                                             AUTO 1 MUTE




                                                                                                                                                                                                    INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                   STEREO                                                                         AUS/OFF




                                                                                                                                                                                                    INFRAROT-REGLER



                                                                                                                                                                                                                 R
                                                                                                                           NORMAL 2 RS232         SERVICE




                                                                                                                                                                                                         AUSGANG
                                                                                                                                                                                                          OUTPUT
                                                                                                                          SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL
                                                               INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER                                          HIGH   2    AVC     LOW
                                                               INTERNAL SPEAKER                                            AUS/OFF   3    AVC     EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                        L
                                                                                                                            STEREO   4    MODE    2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                                                CD   5
                                                                                                                                     INPUT        TAPE
                                                                                             F1         F2     F3   F4     AUS/OFF 6 BGM          EIN/ON
            The device from which the volume is                CD-TRAFO
                                                                                                                                                                                                                BGM


                                                               CD-TRANSFORMER
                                                                                                                                                                  ERWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                   EXTENSION
            changed determines it.                             BUBBLE-TUBES
                                                                                                                                                                                     FERNREGLER
                                                                                                                                                                                   REMOTE-CONTROL



                                                                                              NETZTRAFO
            The volume control unit can be taken                                             TRANSFORMER                                                        DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                                                                                                REMOVE COVER

            out and may be mounted at another
            place as a remote control. Its cable
            may be extended as required with any
            kind of wire. The voltages of the cont-
            rol wires are 5V DC.

            The control box has two volume knobs (Intern / Channel 1 and Extern / Channel 2). In position ”Ste-
            reo” the knob “Intern / Channel 1” is effective for the internal speakers. The knob Extern / Channel 2
            is controlling the volume of the RCA outputs for an optional external amplifier. In DIP switch position
            ”2 Channel” the channels 1 (RH) and 2 (LH) are controlled separately.

            ATTENTION! The pots Vol. 1 and Vol. 2 on the amplifier are not effective if the wire control
            box is connected.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                  53
                       The infrared remote control




                       12.7        The infrared remote control
                                   As desired an infrared remote control will be installed
                                   from factory or can be delivered as conversion kit (part
                                   no. 0058809). If it has been installed the hand transmitter
                                   is located in the cashbox.

                                   If credit is given or free play is programmed a CD can be                                RCS-K

                                                                                                                       No.: 0059745
                                   selected with the buttons 0 to 9 and R.                        SELECTION

                                                                                                   1      2        3      OPTION



                                   Double button functions as required in the service pro-         4     5         6       RESET
                                                                                                                                          selection buttons
                                   grams (i.e. press button 5 -hold down- and press button         7     8         9


                                   R), are impossible. For this you only can use the key-                0


                                   board of the jukebox.                                                                  POWER

                                                                                                   VOLUME
                                                                                                   -       +
                                                                                                                    INTERN

                                   You can control the volume by means of the buttons +            -      +
                                                                                                                   CHANNEL 1

                                                                                                                    EXTERN

                                   and -. In stereo mode the internal +/- buttons control the    CANCEL MUTE
                                                                                                                   CHANNEL 2



                                   volume of the internal speakers. The external +/- buttons
                                   control the volume of the K99 RCA jacks for an optional
                                   external amplifier. In 2-channel mode you can control the                                     music control buttons
                                   external speakers by the buttons + and - of the external
                                   channel.
                                                                                                                                          battery type
                                   Beam the jukebox directly if possible.                                                                 LR03 (AAA)

                                   You can connect the wire remote control box as well.                 BATTERY:
                                                                                                        IEC LR03
                                                                                                        (AAA)


                                                                                                                              +
                                   The power-on volume level is always set by the channel 1       +
                                   and 2 pots on the amplifier or on the control box (if con-                                         +
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                   nected).
                                                                                                       +
                                   Batteries will be delivered. Necessary are 4 micro cells                                               position of
                                   type LR03 (AAA).                                                                                       the batteries

                                   To open the battery compartment move the cover like
                                   shown in the picture.

                                   Needed battery type and position of the batteries in the
                                   hand transmitter are shown on the casing.

                                   Part no. of the hand transmitter: 0059745.




                              54                                                                                            PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                                                           Treble and bass control




12.8        Treble and bass control
            You can control the sound with the knobs                                      DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                          REMOVE COVER
            bass and treble on the amplifier.




                                                                                                                                                                                                                    EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                      Verstärker K 99




                                                                                                                                                                                                                     EXTRA INPUT 300mV
                                                                          MECHANIK                                                    Amplifier K 99 C-UL




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  R
                                                                          MECHANISM
                                                                                                                                                      MONO

                                                                                                                                                     STEREO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                         L
                                                                                                             CAUTION




                                                                                OPTION

                                                                                          OPTION
                                                                                                       TO REDUCETHE RISK
                                                                                                       OF FIRE REPLA ONL
                                                                                                                    CE      Y         Intern   Extern
                                                                                                       WITH SAMETYPE AND            Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass              Treble   BGM
                                                                                                       RATING FUSE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                    EINGANG CD

                                                                                                                                                                                                                             R
                                                                                                        SICHERUNG




                                                                             EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER




                                                                                                                                                                                                                     INPUT CD
                                                                                                                     F1 - F4
                                                                                                        FUSE




                                                                               EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                               L
                                                                                                       100-240 V 117 V




                                                                                   8W / 80 W
                                                                                                       50Hz/60Hz 60Hz




                                                                                                                                                                                                                    L
                                                                                                                                                ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                                       T4A          3,0 AMP                                MUTE
                                                                                                                    250 V AC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                          MICROPHONE
                                                                                                                                               AVC                TAPE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                           MIKROFON
                                                                                                                    SLOW BLOW
                                                                                                                                           RS232




                                                                                R




                                                                                                                                                                                                          RS 232
                                                                                                       30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=                   MICRO             BGM
                                                                                                        AC   AC   AC   DC                              ok.
                                                                              2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL
                                                                                                                                               SCHALTER / SWITCHES




                                                                                                                                                                                                          INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                              STEREO                                                    AUTO 1 MUTE        AUS/OFF




                                                                                                                                                                                                          INFRAROT- REGLER



                                                                                                                                                                                                                       R
                                                                                                                                      NORMAL 2 RS232       SERVICE




                                                                                                                                                                                                               AUSGANG
                                                                                                                                                                                                                OUTPUT
                                                                                                                                     SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL
                                                                          INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER                                          HIGH   2   AVC    LOW
                                                                          INTERNAL SPEAKER                                            AUS/OFF   3   AVC    EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                              L
                                                                                                                                       STEREO   4   MODE   2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                                                           CD   5
                                                                                                                                                INPUT      TAPE
                                                                                                       F1      F2       F3     F4     AUS/OFF 6 BGM        EIN/ON
                                                                          CD-TRAFO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                   BGM
                                                                          CD-TRANSFORMER
                                                                                                                                                                           ERWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                            EXTENSION
                                                                                                                                                                                           FERNREGLER
                                                                          BUBBLE-TUBES                                                                                                   REMOTE-CONTROL            ERWEITERUNG



                                                                                                        NETZTRAFO
                                                                                                       TRANSFORMER                                                       DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                                                                                                         REMOVE COVER




12.9        Automatic volume correction
            The AVC sets CDs with different volume levels to an                                       Intern    Extern
                                                                                                     Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass                                 Treble           BGM
            equal level. The level of CDs with a high level will be re-
            duced; the level of low-levelled CDs will be increased.
            This control works rather slow to save the dynamic range                                                ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                                                                    MUTE
            of the track.                                                                                          AVC                         TAPE
                                                                                                               RS232




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     RS 232
                                                                                                                 MICRO                     BGM
                                                                                                                        ok.
            You can enable the correction with the DIP switch “AVC”                                             SCHALTER / SWITCHES




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                                                         AUTO 1 MUTE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     INFRAROT-REGLER
                                                                                                                                     AUS/OFF
            (the 3rd swich of the 6 sw. group). Default is AVC disab-                                  NORMAL 2 RS232                SERVICE
                                                                                                      SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL
            led.                                                                                          HIGH      2    AVC         LOW
                                                                                                       AUS/OFF      3    AVC         EIN/ON
                                                                                                        STEREO      4    MODE        2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                            CD      5
                                                                                                                 INPUT               TAPE
            With the second DIP switch of the 6 sw. group you can                                      AUS/OFF 6 BGM                 EIN/ON


            reduce the intensity of the volume correction.                                                                                                           RWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                     EXTENSION
                                                                                                                                                                                           FERNREGLER
                                                                                                                                                                                         REMOTE-CONTROL




12.10       Background Music - volume attenuation
            In the BGM (Back Ground Music) mode the reproduction                                      Intern    Extern
                                                                                                     Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass                                 Treble           BGM
            volume will be reduced by a certain factor.

            The signal “BGM” pin 1 plug brown of the SCC unit cont-                                                 ANZEIGE / DISPLAY

            rols this function. You also can switch on “BGM” by                                                    AVC
                                                                                                                                    MUTE
                                                                                                                                           TAPE
                                                                                                               RS232
            means of the DIP switch “BGM” for test purposes. The
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     RS 232




                                                                                                                 MICRO                    BGM
                                                                                                                        ok.
            RH bottom segment of the status display on the amplifier                                            SCHALTER / SWITCHES
            indicates “BGM active”. You can adjust the volume atte-
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     INFRARED-REMOTE




                                                                                                         AUTO 1 MUTE                AUS/OFF
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     INFRAROT-REGLER




                                                                                                       NORMAL 2 RS232               SERVICE

            nuation with the pot “BGM”, as long as it is active.                                     SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL
                                                                                                          HIGH      2   AVC         LOW
                                                                                                       AUS/OFF      3   AVC         EIN/ON
                                                                                                        STEREO      4   MODE        2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                            CD      5
                                                                                                                 INPUT              TAPE
                                                                                                       AUS/OFF 6 BGM                EIN/ON

                                                                                                                                                                  ERWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                   EXTENSION
                                                                                                                                                                                           FERNREGLER
                                                                                                                                                                                         REMOTE-CONTROL




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                    55
                       External speaker connection




                       12.11       External speaker connection
                                   The amplifier can operate in two diffe-
                                                                                                       DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                   rent modes. The normal operation                                    REMOVE COVER


                                   mode reproduces the music in normal




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                                    Verstärker K 99                            0056041




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 EXTRA INPUT 300mV
                                                                                   4   MECHANIK                                                     Amplifier K 99 C-UL                        0058484




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              R
                                   stereo sound. So external speakers                  MECHANISM
                                                                                                                                                                 MONO

                                   can be added to each channel.                                                                                               STEREO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     L
                                                                                                                                CAUTION




                                                                                             OPTION

                                                                                                       OPTION
                                                                                                                       TO REDUCETHE RISK
                                                                                                                                                    Intern    Extern
                                   The so-called 2-Channel mode uses                                                                CE
                                                                                                                       OF FIRE REPLA ONL
                                                                                                                       WITH SAMETYPE AND
                                                                                                                       RATING FUSE
                                                                                                                                            Y
                                                                                                                                                   Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass           Treble    BGM




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                EINGANG CD

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         R
                                                                                                                        SICHERUNG




                                                                                          EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER
                                   both stereo channels like separate




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 INPUT CD
                                                                                                                                     F1 - F4
                                                                                                                        FUSE




                                                                                            EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                                            L
                                                                                                                       100-240 V 117 V




                                                                                                8W / 80 W
                                   mono amplifiers so that the sound can                                               50Hz/60Hz 60Hz




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                L
                                                                                                                                                            ANZEIGE / DISPLAY

                                                                                                                                                                         1
                                                                                                                       T4A            3,0 AMP                          MUTE
                                                                                                                                      250 V AC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      MICROPHONE
                                   be reproduced in different rooms but                                                                                       AVC             TAPE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       MIKROFON
                                                                                                                                      SLOW BLOW
                                                                                                                                                          RS232




                                                                                             R




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      RS 232
                                                                                                                       30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=                  MICRO          BGM

                                   then in mono only.                                      2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL
                                                                                                                        AC   AC   AC   DC                         ok.
                                                                                                                                                          SCHALTER / SWITCHES




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                                           STEREO                                                      AUTO 1 MUTE     AUS/OFF




                                                                                                                                                                                                                      INFRAROT-REGLER
                                   The amplifier may not be loaded with




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   R
                                                                                                                                                     NORMAL 2 RS232    SERVICE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                           AUSGANG
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            OUTPUT
                                                                                                                                                   SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL
                                                                                       INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER                                            HIGH 2 AVC     LOW
                                   more than 4 ohms per channel (less                  INTERNAL SPEAKER                                              AUS/OFF 3 AVC     EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                          L
                                                                                                                                                      STEREO 4 MODE    2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                                                                          CD 5 INPUT   TAPE

                                   ohms means more load!). On an over-         3       CD-TRAFO
                                                                                                                           F1    F2      F3   F4     AUS/OFF 6 BGM     EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                               BGM
                                                                                       CD-TRANSFORMER
                                                                                                                                                                                       ERWEITERUNG
                                   load it switches itself off. After a cer-           BUBBLE-TUBES
                                                                                                                                                                                        EXTENSION
                                                                                                                                                                                                       FERNREGLER
                                                                                                                                                                                                     REMOTE-CONTROL

                                   tain cool down time it switches itself                                                                                                                            2
                                                                                                                            NETZTRAFO
                                   on. So if you do not eliminate the re-                                                  TRANSFORMER                                               DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                                                                                                                     REMOVE COVER

                                   ason for the overload the amplifier
                                   produces continuously volume drop-          Position of the Stereo - Mono DIP switch (1), the mode
                                   outs.                                       switch in the 6 sw.group (2), the stereo - 2 channel
                                                                               switch (3) and the external speaker terminals (4).
                                   The impedance of all external spea-
                                   kers per channel in ”Stereo” mode
                                   should not be less than 4 ohms.

                                   The amplifier applies approx. 55 watts
                                   (rms on max. 1% dist.) on a 4 ohms                                                            Normal operation mode (Stereo)
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                   speaker per channel, 18 watts to a 12               DIP switch “Mode”, slide switch Stereo-2channel and Mono-Stereo switch

                                   ohms speaker and approx. 9 watts to                                                                        in position STEREO

                                   a 24 ohms speaker. That means, that
                                   e.g., a 12 ohms speaker connected to                                                         L                                                                    Terminal
                                   the external channel at Dual Channel                                                                                                                              L-extern
                                   operation must be a type of at least 18                            Stereo
                                                                                                                                                   2C

                                   Watts, otherwise the speaker is in                                             “Mode”
                                   danger of destruction at higher volu-
                                   mes. Note that speaker groups like in
                                   hi-fi boxes may have, at certain fre-                                                                                                                              Terminal
                                                                                                                                R                                                                     R-extern
                                   quencies, impedance much lower than
                                   their rating. Make sure that all spea-                 DIP switch
                                                                                                                                        2channel-
                                   kers are connected in correct polarity.                                                                stereo
                                                                                                                                       slide switch




                            56                                                                                                                                 PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 External amplifier connection




            NOTE: Connect external speakers to the screw terminals on the LH amplifier side.



                                                  DECKEL ABNEHMEN                                                                                                                                                                                                                            DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                  REMOVE COVER                                                                                                                                                                                                                               REMOVE COVER




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                                                                 EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Verstärker K 99




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             EXTRA INPUT 300mV
                                                                                                                                                                                  EXTRA INPUT 300mV
                                                                                                   Verstärker K 99                             0056041                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    0056041
                                                                                                   Amplifier K 99 C-UL                                                                                                                                                     MECHANIK                                                           Amplifier K 99 C-UL




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          R
                                MECHANIK                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  0058484




                                                                                                                                                                                               R
                                                                                                                                               0058484
                                MECHANISM                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  MECHANISM




              4Ω                                                                                                   MONO


                                                                                                                                                                                                       4Ω                                 2Ω                                                                                                                  MONO


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2Ω




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 L
                                                                                                                                                                                      L
                                                                                                                  STEREO                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     STEREO
                                                                            CAUTION                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     CAUTION




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  OPTION

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             OPTION
                                       OPTION

                                                  OPTION
                                                                      TO REDUCETHE RISK                                                                                                                                                                                                                          TO REDUCETHE RISK
                                                                                   CE
                                                                      OF FIRE REPLA ONL    Y        Intern   Extern                                                                                                                                                                                                           CE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 OF FIRE REPLA ONL    Y        Intern   Extern


                       +                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         +
                                                                      WITH SAMETYPE AND           Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass                                                                                                                                                                                       WITH SAMETYPE AND           Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass          Treble         BGM
                                                                      RATING FUSE
                                                                                                                                    Treble         BGM                                                                                                                                                           RATING FUSE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            EINGANG CD
                                                                                                                                                                                 EINGANG CD




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     R
                                                                                                                                                                                          R




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER
                                    EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER
                                                                       SICHERUNG                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  SICHERUNG




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             INPUT CD
                                                                                                                                                                                  INPUT CD
                                                                                    F1 - F4                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    F1 - F4
                                                                       F                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          F   USE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                L
                                                                           USE




                                      EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                     L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              +
                                                                      100-240 V 117 V                                                                                                                                                                                                                            100-240V 117 V




                                                                                                                                                                                                        +                                +




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     8W / 80 W
                                          8W / 80 W
                                                                      50Hz/60Hz 60Hz                                                                                                                                                                                                                             50Hz/60Hz 60Hz




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            L
                                                                                                                                                                                 L
             +
                                                                                                           ANZEIGE / DISPLAY                                                                                                                                                                                                                          ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                      T4A             3,0 AMP                     MUTE                                                                                                                                                                                           T4A             3,0 AMP                     MUTE
                                                                                      250 V AC                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   250 V AC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  MICROPHONE
                                                                                                                                                                                       MICROPHONE
                                                                                                             AVC                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        AVC




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   MIKROFON
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    TAPE




                                                                                                                                                                                        MIKROFON
                                                                                      SLOW BLOW                          TAPE                                                                                                                                                                                                    SLOW BLOW
                                                                                                         RS232                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      RS232




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  R




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 RS 232
                                       R




                                                                                                                                                                      RS 232
                                                                      30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=                  MICRO        BGM                                                                                                                                                                                      30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=                  MICRO        BGM




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 +
                                                                       AC   AC   AC   DC                                                                                                                                                                                                                          AC   AC   AC   DC



                      +
                                                                                                                     ok.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        ok.
                                    2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL                                                                                                                                                                                                                        2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL
                                                                                                             SCHALTER / SWITCHES                                                                                                                                                                                                                        SCHALTER / SWITCHES




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                                                                                                                      INFRARED-REMOTE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 INFRAROT-REGLER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         1




                                                                                                                                                                      INFRAROT-REGLER
                                    STEREO                                                                    1                                                                                                                                                                STEREO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              R
                                                                                                                                                                                   R




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      AUSGANG
                                                                                                                                                                           AUSGANG
                                                                                                              2                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       OUTPUT
                                                                                                                                                                            OUTPUT
                                                                                                              1                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          1
                                INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER                                                       2                                                                                                                                                              INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER                                                       2
                                INTERNAL SPEAKER                                                    AUS/OFF 3 AVC EIN/ON                                                                                                                                                   INTERNAL SPEAKER                                                    AUS/OFF 3 AVC EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     L
                                                                                                                                                                          L
                                                                                                    STEREO 4 MODE 2-KANAL/2CHANNEL                                                                                                                                                                                                             STEREO 4 MODE 2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                         CD 5 INPUT T APE                                                                                                                                                                                                                           CD 5 INPUT T APE
                                                                      F1         F2     F3   F4                                                                                                                                                                                                                  F1         F2    F3    F4     AUS/OFF 6 BGM   EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          BGM
                                                                                                    AUS/OFF 6 BGM     EIN/ON                                                                                                                                               CD-TRAFO




                                                                                                                                                                               BGM
                                CD-TRAFO
                                CD-TRANSFORMER                                                                                                                                                                                                                             CD-TRANSFORMER
                                                                                                                                     ERWEITERUNG                                                                                                                                                                                                                                ERWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                                      EXTENSION                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  EXTENSION
                                                                                                                                                       FERNREGLER                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 FERNREGLER
                                BUBBLE-TUBES                                                                                                         REMOTE-CONTROL                                                                                                        BUBBLE-TUBES                                                                                                         REMOTE-CONTROL



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      NETZTRAFO



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2Ω
                                                                        NETZTRAFO



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          2Ω
                                                                      TRANSFORMER                                                  DECKEL ABNEHMEN                                                                                                                                                               TRANSFORMER                                                  DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                                                                   REMOVE COVER                                                                                                                                                                                                                               REMOVE COVER


                              Achtung!                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Achtung!
                              Vor Abnahme der Kappe den Netzstecker                                            240                                                                                                                                                       Vor Abnahme der Kappe den Netzstecker                                            240
                                                                                                                     Netzspannung                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Netzspannung
                              ziehen!                                                                          230                                                                                                                                                       ziehen!                                                                          230
                                                                                                                      50/60 Hz                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   50/60 Hz
                              Warning!                                                                         220                                                                                                                                                       Warning!                                                                         220
                              Shock hazard!                 Do not open!                                       210   Mains Voltage                                                                                                                                       Shock hazard!                 Do not open!                                       210   Mains Voltage
                                                                                                               117    50/60 cps                                                                                                                                                                                                                           117    50/60 cps




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         +                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    +
                                                                                                               100                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        100




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Verstärker
                                                                            Zur Beachtung: Nur Sicherungen mit                        Verstärker                                                                                                                                                                        Zur Beachtung: Nur Sicherungen mit




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Amplifier
                                    Netzsicherung                           gleicher Größe und gleichem Wert                          Amplifier                                                                                                                                Netzsicherung                            gleicher Größe und gleichem Wert
                           Schein-  Mains Fuse                              verwenden, um Schäden zu vermeiden.                                                                                                                                                       Schein-  Mains Fuse                               verwenden, um Schäden zu vermeiden.
                           annehmer 210-240V - T 4A                                                                                                                                                                                                                   annehmer 210-240V - T 4A
                                    100-117V - F 6A                         Caution: To reduce the risk of fire                                                                                                                                                       Bill-    100-117V - F 6A                          Caution: To reduce the risk of fire
                           Bill-                                            replace only with same typ and rating fuses.                                                                                                                                                                                                replace only with same typ and rating fuses.
                           acceptor                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   acceptor
                                                                           Externer Hauptschalter                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Externer Hauptschalter
                                                                           External Mains switch                                                                                                                                                                                                                      External Mains switch

                                                                           Leuchtstofflampen                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Leuchtstofflampen
                                                                           Fluorescent Lamps                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Fluorescent Lamps
                                                                             230V / 117V                                                                                                                                                                                                                                230V / 117V




                 In Stereo mode do not connect a single                                                                                                                                                                                       Two speakers of 2ohm also represent
                 speaker with less than 4ohm to each                                                                                                                                                                                          total impedance of 4ohm.
                 channel.



12.12       External amplifier connection
            On the RCA terminals “Ausgang - Out-
                                                                                                                                                                                                                            DECKEL ABNEHMEN
            put” you can connect an external amp-                                                                                                                                                                           REMOVE COVER


            lifier with any power rate. In Stereo




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   EXTRA EINGANG 300mV
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Verstärker K 99                                                                            0056041




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    EXTRA INPUT 300mV
                                                                                                                                                                                                            MECHANIK                                              Amplifier K 99 C-UL                                                                        0058484




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 R
                                                                                                                                                                                                            MECHANISM
            mode the output level is normally cont-                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          MONO

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    STEREO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        L
            rolled by means of the pot for the 2nd                                                                                                                                                                                            CAUTION




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  OPTION

                                                                                                                                                                                                                            OPTION




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        TO REDUCETHE RISK
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        OF FIRE REPLA ONL
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     CE      Y    Intern    Extern
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        WITH SAMETYPE AND        Channel 1 Channel 2 Bass                                               Treble                  BGM
            channel. Alternatively you can set the                                                                                                                                                                                      RATING FUSE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   EINGANG CD

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            R
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         SICHERUNG
                                                                                                                                                                                                               EXTERNER LAUTSPRECHER




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    INPUT CD
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      F1 - F4
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         FUSE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 EXTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 L




            first DIP switch of the 6 sw. group to                                                                                                                                                                                      100-240 V 117 V
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     8W / 80 W




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        50Hz/60Hz 60Hz




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        T4A          3,0 AMP
            ON to couple this output to the normal                                                                                                                                                                                                   250 V AC
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        MUTE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         MICROPHONE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           AVC                                    TAPE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          MIKROFON
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     SLOW BLOW
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       RS232
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  R




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                RS 232
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        30V~ 26V~ 26V~ 12V=              MICRO                                   BGM
            volume control knobs (1st channel), so                                                                                                                                                              2-KANAL / 2-CHANNEL
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         AC   AC   AC   DC                      ok.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        SCHALTER / SWITCHES

            that both amplifiers can be controlled



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                INFRARED-REMOTE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                STEREO                                              AUTO 1 MUTE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                INFRAROT-REGLER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          AUS/OFF




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             R
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  NORMAL 2 RS232




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     AUSGANG
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          SERVICE




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      OUTPUT
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL
                                                                                                                                                                                                            INTERNER LAUTSPRECHER
            together.                                                                                                                                                                                       INTERNAL SPEAKER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     HIGH 2 AVC
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  AUS/OFF 3 AVC
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          LOW
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          EIN/ON




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    L
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   STEREO 4 MODE                          2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       CD 5 INPUT                         TAPE
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        F1      F2    F3   F4     AUS/OFF 6 BGM                           EIN/ON
                                                                                                                                                                                                            CD-TRAFO




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  BGM
                                                                                                                                                                                                            CD-TRANSFORMER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             ERWEITERUNG
            Connecting an external amplifier in 2-                                                                                                                                                          BUBBLE-TUBES
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              EXTENSION
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                FERNREGLER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              REMOTE-CONTROL

            channel mode is not useful.                                                                                                                                                                                                  NETZTRAFO
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        TRANSFORMER                                                                                    DECKEL ABNEHMEN
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       REMOVE COVER

            To avoid hum- (earth-) loops try to use
            an external amplifier with ground insu-
            lation; it has no earth contacts. If it is impossible (e.g. receivers with cable supply) you can separate
            both amps by means of the ground isolator part no. 0053300.

            The signal of the RCA terminals is also controlled by the settings of bass, treble, BGM, AVC and
            Mute.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           57
                       Disabling the internal mute circuit




                       12.13        Disabling the internal mute circuit
                                    With the optional BGM-Connector
                                    (part no. 0048133) you can connect
                                    an external source to the jukebox. In
                                    this case the amplifier should not be
                                    muted during standby of the jukebox.

                                    Please switch off the internal mute cir-
                                    cuit by setting the first DIP switch of                         ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                                                 MUTE
                                    the 2 sw. group “Mute” to OFF.                                 AVC
                                                                                               RS232
                                                                                                                        TAPE

                                                                                                 MICRO                BGM
                                                                                                       ok.
                                                                                               SCHALTER / SWITCHES
                                    For more information order the Deut-               AUTO 1 MUTE
                                                                                     NORMAL 2 RS232
                                                                                                                 AUS/OFF
                                                                                                                 SERVICE


                                    sche Wurlitzer GmbH technical infor-            SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL
                                                                                        HIGH
                                                                                     AUS/OFF
                                                                                                    2
                                                                                                    3
                                                                                                        AVC
                                                                                                        AVC
                                                                                                                 LOW
                                                                                                                 EIN/ON


                                    mation leaflets TI-MA-116 (for F91).              STEREO
                                                                                          CD   INPUT
                                                                                     AUS/OFF 6 BGM
                                                                                                    4
                                                                                                    5
                                                                                                        MODE     2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                                                 TAPE
                                                                                                                 EIN/ON


                                                                                                                               ERWEITERUNG




                       12.14        Input selector
                                    With the 5th DIP switch of the 6 sw.
                                    group you can set either CD or tape
                                    input as active.
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                                                                          ANZEIGE / DISPLAY
                                                                                                        MUTE
                                                                                         AVC                   TAPE
                                                                                     RS232
                                                                                       MICRO                  BGM
                                                                                              ok.
                                                                                      SCHALTER / SWITCHES
                                                                                  AUTO 1 MUTE           AUS/OFF
                                                                                NORMAL 2 RS232          SERVICE
                                                                               SEPARATE 1 VOLUME PARALLEL
                                                                                   HIGH   2   AVC       LOW
                                                                                AUS/OFF   3   AVC       EIN/ON
                                                                                 STEREO   4   MODE      2-KANAL/2CHANNEL
                                                                                     CD   5
                                                                                          INPUT         TAPE
                                                                                AUS/OFF 6 BGM           EIN/ON


                                                                                                                          ERWEITERUNG
                                                                                                                           EXTENSION




                             58                                                                          PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                                   Hints of connectable speaker loads




13          70v output transformer (0043157)
            If you want to work with different speakers with any other impedances or with 70V systems, we re-
            commend to use the output transformer. You can than connect speakers between 2Ω and 16Ω toge-
            ther but complete independent to each other.

            If you want to connect several speakers by means of an output transformer pay attention to the follo-
            wing hints:

            1.   To avoid an interruption of all speakers by the overload protection circuit or a decrease of vo-
                 lume by the clipping stage, the total power outlet of the amplifier should not be exceeded.

            2.   All speakers must be connected with the correct polarity.

            3.   To operate each external speaker with the desired volume level, pay attention to the respective
                 efficiency, impedance and load limit.

            4.   To avoid cable losses on long speaker lines (more than 60 feet) and low impedance, 70Volt-
                 systems should be used as much as possible.

            5.   If speakers with low impedance (2Ω, 4Ω) are used, each speaker should have its own line with
                 sufficient cross-section.

            6.   When an output transformer is used no speakers should be connected to the screwing terminals
                 on the power amplifier board P4A.




                                                                                                                                                        FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
            7.   Note: The 2-channel option can not be used in connection with an output transformer without
                 modifying the pre-amp board.


            The internal speakers can be operated with lower volume (switches on the connecting board). In po-
            sition HIGH power consumption of the internal speakers is approx. 32W, in position LOW approx.
            10W.


                       to amplifier
                                        70V             0V
                                                              CLASS 2 WIRING                 70V              0V
                                                                                                                      to speaker
                                                                                                                      crossover


                                              output transformer F91 / K99 no. 0043157
                        LEFT                                 volume internal speakers
                                                                                                                   RIGHT
                                 high   17,6V 14,1V 11,8V 3,2V 1,1V   0V   K99 17,6V 14,1V 11,8V 3,2V 1,1V    0V   high
                                        32,8V 30V 22V 6V        2V    0V   F91 32,8V 30V 22V 6V        2V     0V
                                 low      6     5     4     3    2     1         6     5     4     3    2      1   low




                  speaker power switch                                                                       speaker power switch
                  LH channel                                                                                 RH channel




13.1        Hints of connectable speaker loads
            The maximum power output per channel is 170 Watts (rms) for F91 and 55 Watts (rms) for K99. The
            power consumption of the connected speakers can be higher (i.e. 200 W) than the maximum remai-
            ning power outlet of the amplifier. If the power consumption is lower (i.e. 10 W) than the maximum
            remaining power outlet of the amplifier, it can be adapted by means of the output transformer.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                             59
                       Determination of the connectable speaker power




                       13.2        Determination of the connectable speaker power
                                   The real power consumption of a speaker equals the square of the voltage applied to the speaker
                                   terminals divided through the speaker impedance (P = U² / R). The power values calculated in this
                                   way are shown in the following table. The volume level really delivered depends also on the speaker
                                   sensitivity and varies from type to type, but it is possible to level out these differences in certain li-
                                   mits.


                       13.3        Hints for speaker connection
                                   !    How much amplifier output will be used for the additional speakers, high or low.
                                        ! 140W (F91) / 45W (K99) are available, if the speaker power switch is in position LOW.
                                        ! 70W (F91) / 23W (K99) are available, if the speaker power switch is in position HIGH.

                                   !    The load of all speakers has to be added.
                                        ! If the total load of all speakers per channel is higher than the delivered amplifier outlet power,
                                          not all speakers may work with the maximum power.
                                        ! If the total load of all speakers per channel is lower than the delivered amplifier outlet power,
                                          all speakers may work with the maximum power, a power reserve additionally.
                                   !    For an efficient use of the speaker power the optimum impedance in conjunction with the output
                                        transformer connection possibilities has to be determined.



                                   Delivered maximum power in Watt if speakers with an impedance          Voltage ap-    Terminal number
                                   of xx Ohm are connected (F91/K99).                                     plied to the   and polarity
                                                                                                          terminals
                                                                                                          in Voltrms
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                       16Ohm     12 Ohm       8 Ohm      6 Ohm      4 Ohm       2 Ohm      F91/K99         pos        neg
                                                             0.5 F91     0.7/0.2     1/0.3      2/0.6        2/1.1          2           1
                                                 0.7 F91      1 F91      1.3/0.4     2/0.6      3.9/1.1     2.8/1.5         6           5
                                       1 F91      1.3/0.4     2/0.5      2.7/0.7     4/1.1      8/2.2        4/2.1          3           2
                                       2.3/0.6    3/0.85      4.5/1.3    6/1.7       9/2.6      18/5.1       6/3.2          3          1
                                        4/1.2     5.3/1.5     8/2.3     10.7/3.1    16/4..6     32/9.3       8/4.3          5           4
                                       7.3/2.1    9.7/2.8     15/4.2     19/5.6     29/8.4     58/16.8      10.8/5.8        6          4
                       LOW             16/4.6     21/6.2      32/9.3    43/12.3     64/18.5     128/37      16/8.6          4          3
                                       25/7.2     33/9.5     50/14.3    67/19.1    100/28.6    200/57.2     20/10.7         4          2
                                       30/8.7    40/11.6     61/17.4    81/23.2    121/34.8        *        22/11.8         4          1
                                       36/10.4   48/13.9     72/20.8    96/27.7    144/41.6        *        24/12.9         5          3
                       HIGH            49/14.1   65/18.8     98/28.1    131/37.5   196/56.25       *         28/15          5          2
                                       56/16.2   75/21.6     113/32.4   150/43.2       *           *        30/16.1         5          1
                                       59/17.4   79/23.2     119/34.9   158/46.5       *           *       30.8/16.7        6          2
                                       67/19.4   90/25.8     134/38.7   179/51.6       *           *       32.8/17.6        6          1




                              60                                                                                 PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                             Connection of 70v systems




13.4        Connection of 70v systems
            70V systems are intended for transmissions over long distances. They also have their own transfor-
            mer in front of the speakers. The primary (input-)side of this transformer has to be connected in cor-
            rect polarity with the 70V terminals of the Deutsche Wurlitzer GmbH output transformer. It is not
            allowed to consume more power than the amplifier is able to supply (23W or 45W), minus the additi-
            onal speakers eventually connected to the output transformer. At some 70V-systems the load is ca-
            pable of variation.


                                                                                       KL
                                                                        32,8V

                                 +                                      30V     HIGH
                                                            70V
                                                                        22V
                70v system                                              6V
                                                                                LOW

                                 -                                      2V
                                                            0V
                                                                                HIGH
                                                                        0V




                                 from amplifier
                                                                                       KR
                                                                        32,8V




                                                                                         6
                                                                        30V     HIGH
                                 +




                                                                                         5
                                                            70V
                                                                        22V




                                                                                         4
                70v system                                              6V
                                                                                LOW




                                                                                         3
                                 -                          0V          2V




                                                                                         2
                                                                                HIGH
                                                                        0V




                                                                                         1




                                                                                                                         FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                              61
                       Service data, level 4 button 8




                       14           Technician Statistics

                       14.1         Service data, level 4 button 8
                                    Special data for the jukebox service are displayed in service level 4 button 8. By pressing the button
                                    8 several times you can call up the contents of up to 18 different storage locations stored in the be-
                                    low explained statistical values.

                                    These data are useful to assess the condition of the jukebox and its mechanism.

                                    1.    Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC-unit to ON.

                                    2.    Press ‘LT’ button.

                                    3.    Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.

                                    4.    Press selection button 4. Service level 4 is reached. Display shows: 4_ _ _.


                       14.1.1       Retrieval of the last occured mechanism faults
                                    The SCC unit stores up to 9 of the last occurred mechanism error codes (procedure step codes) If
                                    more errors have occured only the latest 9 are stored.

                                    1.    Press selection button 8, display shows flashing:
                                          # 1 = 1st error code
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                          then eg.
                                          # 1st error code is always 000
                                              (memory check).

                                    2.    Press selection button 8 again, display shows flashing:
                                          # 2 = last occured error code


                                          then e.g.
                                          # Error 160: Error when reaching the vertical take out position.

                                    3.    Press selection button 8 once more to display the next error code etc.
                                          After displaying the 10th code, special values will be displayed (ref to the following chapters).

                                    4.    DELETE this data: Press selection button 8 - hold - and press button R.

                                    5.    Exit: Press button R.




                              62                                                                                  PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                Service data, level 4 button 8




            Procedure step codes for ‘CD to turntable’:
                 in rest         in action   meaning
                   32               160      selection sledge has reached the vertical ‘take out position’
                   33               161      open gripper (before taking a CD)
                   34               162      move gripper into magazine
                   35               163      close gripper (get a CD)
                   36               164      get a CD from magazine and move to the vertical transport level (LH or RH side)
                   37               165      move the CD player - move sledge to player unit
                   38               166      move gripper to the horizontal player position
                   39               167      move sledge with CD to the player
                   40               168      open gripper (release CD)
                   41               169      move gripper out of player range
                   42               170      fix the CD with the puck
                   43                        CD on player, end of procedure




            Procedure step codes for ‘CD to magazine’:
                 in rest         in action   meaning
                   16               144      get vertical sledge position over the player
                   17               145      move gripper horizontal to take the CD
                   18               146      close gripper
                   19               147      lift CD
                   20               148      move to vertical transport level
                   21               149      move sledge to magazine return position




                                                                                                                                 FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
                   22               150      move gripper with CD into magazine
                   23               151      open gripper
                   24               152      move gripper out of magazine
                   25               153      move sledge to 0-position
                   26                        CD is taken back, end of procedure


14.1.2      Counter for complete mechanism cycles
            After the end of each replacing procedure the counter will be incremented. This information given in
            the steps 11 and 12 of service level 4 button 8 will be displayed with 8 digits. Because of a four digit
            display, this value will be displayed in two parts the 4 higher and the 4 lower digits. To display the
            complete value:

            1.   Press selection button 8 as often as, display shows flashing:
                 # 11 = next displayed value are the 4 high value digits of the mecha-
                    nism counter

                 then e.g.
                 # value, means 1 60 0000

            2.   Press selection button 8 again, display shows flashing:
                 # 12 = next displayed value are the 4 low value digits of the mecha-
                    nism counter

                 then e.g.
                 # value, means 3 467


            In this example the machine has placed and replaced the CDs 1,603,467 times.



PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                     63
                       Service data, level 4 button 8




                       14.1.3       Counter for total number of mechanism faults
                                    Each mechanism error will be counted. This information given in the steps 13 and 14 of service level
                                    4 button 8 will be displayed with 8 digits too. To display the complete value:

                                    1.    Press selection button 8 as often as, display shows flashing:
                                          # 13 = next displayed value are the 3 high value digits of the error
                                             counter
                                          then e.g.
                                          # value

                                    2.    Press selection button 8 again, display shows flashing:
                                          # 14 = next displayed value are the 3 low value digits of the error
                                             counter
                                          then e.g.
                                          # value. In this example 250 errors have occurred.


                       14.1.4       Counter for total number of power up’s
                                    Each power up will be counted. This information given in the steps 15 and 16 of service level 4 but-
                                    ton 8 will be displayed with 8 digits too. To display the complete value:

                                    1.    Press selection button 8 as often as, display shows flashing:
                                          # 15 = next displayed value are the 4 high value digits of the power up
                                             counter
                                          then e.g.
                                          # value
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                    2.    Press selection button 8 again, display shows flashing:
                                          # 16 = next displayed value are the 4 low value digits of the power up
                                             counter
                                          then e.g.
                                          # value. In this example the power was switched on 10023 times.


                       14.1.5       Counter for total operating time
                                    The operating time displayed in the steps 17 and 18 of service level 4 button 8 will be displayed in
                                    minutes with 8 digits too. To retrieve the complete value:

                                    1.    Press selection button 8 as often as, display shows flashing:
                                          # 17 = next displayed value are the 4 high value digits of the operating
                                             time counter
                                          then e.g.
                                          # value

                                    2.    Press selection button 8 again, display shows flashing:
                                          # 18 = next displayed value are the 4 low value digits of the operating
                                             time counter
                                          then e.g.
                                          # value. In this example the total operating time is 241453 minutes (ap-
                                              prox. 4024 h).




                             64                                                                                  PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                     Digital display test / EPROM-version, level 1 button 4




15          Function tests
            The function tests are divided in 3 groups. Display test (level 1), mechanism tests (level 4) and
            player tests (level 5).


15.1        Digital display test / EPROM-version, level 1 button 4

            1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to
                                                                                              slide switch
                 ON.                                                                             service                                                  LT button

            2.   Press ‘LT’ button. Display shows e.g.: _ 4 0 9
                 (409 or higher = SCC program version)                                                    Z    T.T.  F       7        6        6       6                         1
                                                                                                               +2    6       6        5        5       5                         2
                                                                                                               +3    5       5        4        4       4                         4
                                                                                        K                      BR    4       4        3        3       3                         5
                                                                                                         ON          3       3        2        2       2                        T1
                                                                                              SERVICE                2       2        1        1       1          M             10
                                                                                                        OFF                                                            LT
                                                                                                                     0       0        0        0       0                        20

            3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press                                               GP + 6 GP      BS    B4 B3       B2      B1
                                                                                                                                                                                +B
                                                                                                                                                                                    T




                 selection button 0 than release both buttons. The
                 display is dark.                                                                                     ACHTUNG:      MEMORY - Stecker von OFF
                                                                                                                                    auf ON umstecken, wenn
                                                                                                                                                                             P6 1
                                                                                                                                                                                6
                                                                                                                                    Top tunes, Popularitätszähler
                                                                                                                                    oder Kassenzähler arbeiten soll.         P5 1
                                                                                                                                                                                5
                                                                                      CD TOWER                        ATTENTION: Move MEMORY Plug from OFF
                                                                                                                                    to ON if Top tunes, Pop Meter or

                                                                                     Selection &                                    Cash Box Content Registration
                                                                                                                                    is required.                                1

            4.   Press selection button 1. Service level 1 is rea-                 Credit Computer                    ATTENTION: Placer la prise MEMORY en
                                                                                                                                    position ON, de la position OFF
                                                                                                                                    si le Top Tunes, le compteur de
                                                                                                                                                                             P8 8


                                                                                                                                    popularité et la contenu de la

                 ched. Display shows: 1_ _ _.                                               CDM 12                                  caisse sont demandés.                      ON
                                                                                                                                                                            Memory
                                                                                                                                                                               OFF
                                                                                                                                                         0045411



            5.   Press selection button 4.
                 # All segments counting 0 to 9 are displayed, then the program version number (EPROM ver-
                    sion).

            6.   To cancel the procedure press selection button R.




                                                                                                                                                                                        FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
15.2        Mechanism single step tests
            Service level 4 includes all functions to check the CD-2 mechanism. Single step and continuous tests
            can be made.

            1.   Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to ON.

            2.   Press ‘LT’ button. Display shows e.g.: _ 4 0 9
                 (409 or higher = SCC program version)

            3.   Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.
                 The display is dark.

            4.   Press selection button 4. Service level 4 is reached. Display shows: 4_ _ _.


15.2.1      Take CD to turntable, level 4 button 0
            Press selection button 0 and enter the desired CD number.

            This function is not supported by program versions below 4.09!


15.2.2      Step selection sledge upwards, level 4 button 2
            Press selection button 2. The button has an auto repeat function.
            Each button operation makes the sledge move one step upwards and the display will be increased
            by 2. Last position is 120.
            If both magazines exist, the left one will be used as reference. If the L.H. magazine is missing the
            other one is used.



PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                                                                        65
                       Mechanism single step tests




                       15.2.3      Step selection sledge downwards, level 4 button 1
                                   Press selection button 1. This button has an auto repeat function.

                                   Display shows _ _ 0 0:

                                   If the display is still 0 0, the selection sledge (german: AusWahlSchlitten - AWS) is located in its lo-
                                   west position (basic position). It is impossible to move it further down. It can only be moved if the
                                   sledge has been moved up with selection button 2 before. Then the display will also show a greater
                                   number as 0 0, e.g.: 22.

                                   Display shows a number greater than 0 0, e.g.: _ _ 2 4

                                   Each button operation makes the sledge move one step downwards and the display will be decrea-
                                   sed by 2. Last position is 02.


                       15.2.4      Get a CD from LH magazine, level 4 button 3

                                   WARNING! After having taken the CD to the turntable the SCC automatically jumps to service level
                                   5! You only can jump back to SL 4 by pressing the button 3 to run the procedure ‘STOP and back to
                                   SL 4’.
                                   Press selection button 3. A CD is taken from the actual sledge/CD position and placed on the turn-
                                   table. The service program automatically jumps to service level 5.


                       15.2.5      Get a CD from RH magazine, level 4 button 4

                                   WARNING! After having taken the CD to the turntable the SCC automatically jumps to service level
                                   5! You only can jump back to SL 4 by pressing the button 3 to run the procedure ‘STOP and back to
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                   SL 4’.
                                   Press selection button 4. A CD is taken from the actual sledge/CD position and placed on the turn-
                                   table. The service program automatically jumps to service level 5.


                       15.2.6      Mechanism continuous tests, level 4 button 9
                                   To locate certain faults occurring only from time to time it may be helpful to run continuous tests. Du-
                                   ring the tests described below, the display shows special procedure step codes. These codes are di-
                                   vided in rest and action codes (ref. to the table opposite).

                                   If the machine stops at a certain point in conjunction with these codes you can determine the point of
                                   fault. In this case you should switch off the jukebox and try to find the reasons of this fault. Then you
                                   have to take the selection sledge in its home position by hand. Home position means: The position of
                                   the magnetic pressure disc is approx. 1 cm (1/2 ”) over the player and the gripper motor stays on the
                                   RH side of the pressure disc holder. The LH edge of the gripper holder should align with the RH
                                   edge of the pressure disc holder. Then switch on the jukebox. It now initializes itself.

                                   Test start:                   Press selection button 9 -hold- and press button R. Release all buttons.
                                                                 Press selection buttons 1 ,2 ,3 or 4, according the table ‘conti-
                                                                 nuous test procedures’. The continuous test starts.
                                   Test stop:                    Press selection button 9.


                                   All continuous tests can be switched to single step mode while running:
                                   Single step - ON:             Press selection button 5.
                                                                 The just running step runs to its end. The machine waits.
                                   Single step - NEXT:           Press selection button 5 again.
                                                                 Only the next one step runs. Press button 5 again etc.
                                   Single step - OFF:            Press selection button 6.



                            66                                                                                  PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                    Mechanism single step tests




            Continuous test procedures
            Selection button 1         CD changer test                    The gripper takes the CD from compartment 119,
                                       Remve all CDs and insert only      takes it to the turntable and back to compartment
                                       the CDs no. 119 and 120 !          099! Now the gripper takes this CD to the turntable
                                                                          and back to compartment 079 e.t.c.. At the end the
                                                                          gripper takes the CD back to comp. 119.
                                                                          Then the same procedure starts on the RH side with
                                                                          CD 120. If an error occurs the machine will stop dis-
                                                                          playing the corresponding error code.
            Selection button 2         gripper test                       The gripper opens and closes continuously.
            Selection button 3         takes the CD no. 30 to and from
                                       the turntable
            Selection button 4         takes the CD no. 29 to and from
                                       the turntable


            Procedure step codes
              in rest   in action meaning
                16        144    get vertical sledge position over the player
                17        145    move gripper horizontal to take the CD




                                                                                                                        CD back to compartment
                18        146    close gripper
                19        147    lift CD
                20        148    move to vertical transport level
                21        149    move sledge to magazine return position
                22        150    move gripper with CD into magazine




                                                                                                                                                 FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
                23        151    open gripper
                24        152    move gripper out of magazine
                25        153    move sledge to 0-position
                26               CD is taken back, end of procedure
                32        160    selection sledge reaches the vertical ’take out position’
                33        161    open gripper (before taking a CD)
                34        162    move gripper into magazine


                                                                                                                        CD to turntable
                35        163    close gripper (get a CD)
                36        164    get a CD from magazine and move to the vertical transport level (LH or RH
                                 side)
                37        165    reach the CD player - move sledge to player unit
                38        166    move gripper to the horizontal player position
                39        167    move sledge with CD to the player
                40        168    open gripper (release CD)
                41        169    move gripper out of player range
                42        170    fix the CD with the pressure disc
                43               CD on player, end of procedure
                48        176    attempt to move the selection sledge to the player
                49        177    initialize the magazines (count to 6161)                                         to initialize
                50        178    move the sledge to the player, after initialization
                80        208    close gripper                                                                    gripper
                81        209    open gripper
                          112    check sum error in memory for CD2 mechanism (e.g. after ’battery off opera-
                                 tion)
                          126    error while error was handed                                                     errors
                          254    total error, e.g. defective RAM or CPU...



PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                         67
                       Light gate tests




                       15.3         Light gate tests
                                    Five light gates are used to position the selection sledge. These sensors scan certain movements.
                                    The name of a light gate corresponds to the principal movement.

                                    1.    Vertical-Lineal-Left (VLL), movement LH side

                                    2.    Horizontal-Lineal-Left (HLL), movement LH side

                                    3.    Vertical-Lineal-Centre (VLC), movement center

                                    4.    Horizontal-Lineal-Right (HLR), movement RH side

                                    5.    Vertical-Lineal-Right (VLR), movement LH side


                       15.3.1       Light gate snapshot, level 4 button 7
                                    To start the test: Press selection button 7.

                                    By pressing selection button 7 a
                                    ‘snapshot’ of the actual gate
                                    state will be made. Then this
                                    state will be displayed in a co-                                                           HLR
                                                                                             HLL
                                    ded form.

                                    An interrupted gate sends a ‘0’
                                    to the corresponding digit in the                                                                      VLR
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                    display.
                                                                            VLL                        VLC
                                    Two gates are combined in the
                                    second and fourth digit (from                             1

                                    RH side) of the display.
                                                                                  2           1                                        1         2
                                    Both left and right gates (VLL,
                                    VLR) send a ‘2’ if open to the
                                    corresponding digit, the others a
                                    ‘1’. This value adds itself.

                                    The RH digit is always 0.
                                                                                                                    RH digit is always 0
                                    To exit the test: Press selection
                                                                                                                    Ý




                                    button R.                                 Example:


                                                                                      VLL            HLL     HLR        VLR
                                                                                      open          inter-   open       open
                                                                                                   rupted
                                                                                                         VLC
                                                                                                     interrupted




                              68                                                                                    PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                                        Light gate tests




15.3.2      Light gate function test, level 4 button 9
            With this test you can check each single light gate by a continuous test loop during operation. A “0”
            in the display represents an open gate, a “1” represents a closed one. The gate to be checked is
            connected by software to the interrupt request line INT1 which is used in normal operation. INT1 is
            always shown in the most RH digit of the display. So do not worry that the left movement VLL is dis-
            played in the second digit from right.

            Test start: Go to service level 4 press selection button 9 - hold - and
            press selection button R. Release both buttons and press selection button
            9 again. The display shows:

            Now you can select different test procedures. Each procedure checks a            INT 2   INT 1
            certain function and the corresponding light gate. The procedures are c: means start address
            numbered from 0 to 9 and can be selected with the selection buttons 1
            (counts downwards) and 2 (counts upwards). The procedures 7, 8 and 9 have no function.

            Depending on the selected test you can carry out special actions by means of the selection buttons 3
            and 4. If you use the selection buttons 5 or 6 each action will be stopped at an occurring bright dark
            or dark bright change (auto edge stop) of the gate.


                                                   Functions of the buttons

                          procedure select -               1       2           procedure select +

          dependent on procedure: selection                3       4          dependent on procedure: selection
          sledge up, to RH side or gripper close                              sledge down, to LH side
                                                                              or gripper open
                                                           5       6




                                                                                                                           FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
                           like button 3,                                      like button 4,
                           but auto edge stop                                  but auto edge stop
                                                           7       8

                                                           9       0

                                                       <       R       >




            Meaning of the tests:
            0        Test: VLL & VLR together. VLL is dis-
            played in the RH digit (INT1), VLR in the second                                           button 4 (6)
            digit from RH (INT2). 1=gate is interrupted,                                         VLR
            0=gate is open. Button 3 (5) makes the selec-                                    M

            tion sledge move downwards, button 4 (6) up-
            wards.                                                            test 0                   button 3 (5)

            1       Test: VLR. State is displayed in the
            RH digit (INT1). 1=gate is interrupted, 0=gate is                                           button 4 (6)
                                                                                                 VLR
            open. Button 3 (5) makes the selection sledge
            move downwards, button 4 (6) upwards.                                            M



                                                                              test 1                    button 3 (5)

            2       Test: VLC (Center). State is displayed
            in the RH digit (INT1). 1=gate is interrupted,                                             button 4 (6)
            0=gate is open. Button 3 (5) makes the selec-
            tion sledge move downwards, button 4 (6) up-                                     M

            wards.
                                                                              test 2   VLC             button 3 (5)




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                               69
                       CD-PRO function tests, level 5




                                   3        Test: VLL . State is displayed in the RH
                                   digit (INT1). 1=gate is interrupted, 0=gate is                                                   button 4 (6)
                                   open. Button 3 (5) makes the selection sledge                              VLL
                                   move downwards, button 4 (6) upwards.                                              M



                                                                                                     test 3                         button 3 (5)

                                   4        Test: VLL . State is displayed in the RH
                                   digit (INT1). 1=gate is interrupted, 0=gate is                     button 3 (5)        button 4 (6)
                                   open. Button 3 (5) makes the gripper move to
                                   the LH side, button 4 (6) to the RH side.                                          M

                                                                                                                              HLR
                                                                                                     test 4
                                   5       Test: HLL . State is displayed in the
                                   RH digit (INT1). 1=gate is interrupted, 0=gate is                  button 3 (5)        button 4 (6)
                                   open. Button 3 (5) makes the gripper move to
                                   the LH side, button 4 (6) to the RH side.                                          M

                                                                                                              HLL
                                                                                                    test 5
                                   6       Test: Gripper. State is displayed in the
                                   RH digit (INT1). 1=gate is interrupted, 0=gate is                                          button 3 (5) OPEN
                                                                                                       gripper
                                   open. Button 3 (5) opens the gripper, button 4
                                   (6) closes it.                                                                     M


                                                                                                                              button 4 (6) CLOSE
                                                                                                     test 6
                       15.4        CD-PRO function tests, level 5
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                   The following tests can be done in service level 5. In some cases level 5 is reached automatically
                                   (see 14.1.4, page 64), because these tests are parts of complete test procedures.

                                   1.    Set the slide switch ‘service’ at the SCC unit to ON.

                                   2.    Press ‘LT’ button. Display shows e.g.: _ 4 0 9
                                         (409 or higher = SCC program version)

                                   3.    Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.
                                         The display is dark.

                                   4.    Press selection button 5. Service level 5 is reached. Display is: 5_ _ _.


                       15.4.1      CD player check (START), level 5 button 6
                                   Before starting this test a CD has to be placed on the turntable (ref to chap. 7.2.4.). If no track has
                                   been selected with the buttons 0 or 9 the complete CD will be played.

                                   Press selection button 6, the CD will start to play beginning with the
                                   first track. The display shows at first:



                                                                                                                                  TRACK number
                                   then the current play time in sec.:

                                   WARNING! Showing the play time in this test is an important indicator
                                   for the serial comunication between the SCC unit and the CD control-
                                   ler!                                                                                          PLAY TIME
                                                                                                                                 (here: 8sec.)




                              70                                                                                    PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                        CD-PRO function tests, level 5




15.4.2      NEXT, level 5 button 0
            Service level 5 has to be reached and a CD has to be placed on the turntable (ref. to chap. 7.2.4).

            Press selection button 0 (several times). The CD starts and the track
            number according to the number of key actuations will be played. Only
            this track will be played. The digital display shows at first e.g.:

                                                                                                     TRACK number
            then the current play time in sec (e.g. 8 sec).

            !   If selection button 0 is pressed again once the next track will be
                played or
            !   if selection button 6 is pressed the remaining tracks of the CD will                PLAY TIME
                                                                                                    of actual track
                be played.


15.4.3      PREVIOUS, level 5 button 9
            Service level 5 has to be reached and a CD has to be placed on the turntable (ref. to chap. 7.2.4.).

            Press selection button 9 (several times too).

            The player jumps to the previous track with each button actuation. If track 1is reached it will be
            played continuously. If button 6 is pressed in between, the remaining tracks of the CD will be played.


15.4.4      STOP, level 5 button 5
            Press selection button 5. CD stops playing. Display shows 5 _ _ _ (service level5).




                                                                                                                         FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
15.4.5      STOP playing and go back to level 4 (level 5 button 3)
            Press selection button 3. CD stops playing. Display shows 4 _ _ _ (service level 4).

            NOTE: To terminate all the tests and return to normal operation: Set slide switch ‘SERVICE’ on the
            SCC unit to OFF. Press ‘LT’ button also on the SCC unit.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                              71
                       Access to the player functions without S&CC unit




                       16          Integrated test program of the CD-PRO player

                       16.1        Access to the player functions without S&CC unit
                                   For a test the complete player unit CD-PRO
                                   can be operated without S&CC unit.

                                   The power supply from the installed ampli-                            one figure
                                                                                                         display
                                   fier, the sub-transformer and an amplifier
                                   with CD input for the audio signal is required.                                          button 1 (mode)




                                                                                            CAUTION
                                   A one digit digital display indicates the cur-                                           button 2
                                   rent operation mode and three command                                                    button 3
                                   buttons are located on the player chassis.

                                   The one digit display is able to display     moment of power ON
                                   more information.
                                                                                                                          reset active
                                   To display two or more digits the infor-
                                   mation starts with a dark phase of ap-
                                   prox. 1 sec. followed by the digits                                         display dark for 1 sec
                                   shown one after another with dark
                                   phase of 100 msec. between each digit.
                                   The most significant digit will be dis-
                                   played at first.
                                                                                                      100ms pause
                                   After power on and after a general reset
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                                                                                                      program
                                   command (display shows “8”), the pro-
                                                                                                                      version number
                                   gram version number of the Deutsche                                                Wurlitzer CD control unit
                                   Wurlitzer GmbH CD control unit will be                                             01.20
                                   displayed with four digits followed by
                                   the version number of the CD-PRO
                                   servo processor with two digits.

                                   If the player is in stand by and the three
                                   buttons on the player are pressed at the                                           date of release
                                                                                                                      08.05.
                                   same time the above mentioned se-
                                   quence will be displayed but without
                                   showing “8” for “reset active”.
                                                                                                                      CD-PRO version
                                                                                                                      number 3.7
                                                                                     time
                                                                                                                      mode = 0




                              72                                                                            PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                           Access to the player functions without S&CC unit




                                                                        Test functions CD-PRO
                                                                        (Example: If mode display = 3 and
                       CAUTION
                                                                        button 2 will be pressed, then pause
                                                                        is switched on.)




             mode display        button 1 (mode)   button 2         button 3                buttons 2 + 3 together

              0                  mode 1            start            stop                    repeat CD
              1                  mode 2            next track       previous track          repeat track
              2                  mode 3            search forward   search backward         single, double speed.
              3                  mode 4            pause ON         pause OFF
              4                  mode 5            volume +         volume -                mute
              5                  mode 0                  1
                                                   track +                1
                                                                    track -                 play selected track
                                                                                            (read TOC if necessary)

            If “repeat CD” had been selected with the
                                                                    Error code                       Meaning
            buttons 2 + 3 in mode 0 the display will be
            “99”. At each beginning of a new track it will                 0         No error




                                                                                                                              FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
            be displayed with two digits.                                  2         Focus error or no disc
                                                                           7         Subcode error, no valid subcode
            If “repeat track” had been selected with the
                                                                           8         TOC error
            buttons 2 + 3 in mode 1 the actual played
            track will be displayed.                                    10           Radial error
                                                                        12           Fatal sledge error
            By pressing of two buttons at the same time                 13           Turntable motor error
            additional values will be displayed:                        31           Search time out
            Buttons 1+2: The last occurred error code                   32           Search binary error
            will be displayed (ref. to error code table).               33           Search index error
            This error code will be reset after this retrie-            34           Search time error
            val or after a CD-PRO reset (e.g. the next                  40           Illegal command
            power on).                                                  41           Illegal value
            Buttons 1+3: The actual playing track will be               42           Illegal time value
            displayed.                                                  43           Communication error
                                                                        44           Reserved
            Buttons 1+2+3:
                                                                        45           HF detector error
            a) No CD is playing: Program version and                    48           Emergency stop
            date of release.

            b) CD is playing: Max. / min. track number will be displayed.

            NOTE: If commands will be sent to the CD-PRO player, the display will flash. During this time no
            commands given by the buttons will be accepted. While the table of contents (TOC) is read an 8 flas-
            hes in the display. In this way, the necessary time to read the TOC can be prolonged. So bad CDs
            can be recognised and taken out.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                   73
                       Special test functions of the CD-PRO player




                       16.2        Special test functions of the CD-PRO player
                                   Service program of CD-PRO (mode 9). With this service program different functions of the CDM12
                                   player can be tested.


                                   How to call:                                                                                    Start service program
                                   Switch main power OFF. Press button 1 - hold
                                   down - and switch main power on. (Remark: “Po-
                                                                                                                              90
                                   wer ON - OFF” can also be done by disconnec-                                                       Laser light OFF
                                   ting the wire bk./gy. from pin 6 of the sub
                                   transformer.)
                                                                                                                              91
                                                                                                                                      Laser light ON

                                   Function:




                                                                                                                                                                 Press button 3 to reach previous step.
                                   The CD control unit steps into mode 9 and runs                                             92
                                   the tests 90 up to 99. Mode 9 will be displayed                                                    Focus OFF
                                   continuously. While changing the test step it will
                                   be displayed with two digits
                                                                                                                              93
                                                                                                                                      Search focus

                                   Remarks:
                                   For starting test step 94 a CD has to be placed       Press button 2 to reach next step.   94
                                   on turntable.                                                                                   Turntable motor OFF


                                   The button 1...
                                                                                                                              95
                                                                                                                                   Turntable motor ON
                                   has no function during this test.
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                   The button 2...
                                                                                                                              96
                                                                                                                                    Radial Servo OFF
                                   switches to the next test step.

                                   The button 3...                                                                            97
                                                                                                                                     Radial Servo ON
                                   switches to the previous test step.
                                                                                                                              98 Sledge moves forward
                                   Quit:                                                                                         and backward.
                                   Press button 2 while test 98 is running. Control
                                   unit steps over test 99 to mode 0 automatically.                                           99 Quit service program,                                                    Mode
                                                                                                                                 back to mode 0.                                                           0




                                   Test 91: You can check the laserlight with an in-
                                   frared indicator.                                                                                                         next test step

                                   Test 93: Without a CD: laser lense moves up
                                   and down. If you put a CD on the turntable while
                                                                                                                                                           previous test step
                                   the test runs the lens stops moving if it finds the
                                   focus point.

                                   Test 95: The turntable motor must spin.

                                   Test 98: The sledge moves itself from inside to outside and back again. If this test is successful the
                                   speed of the disc must change to lower speed at the outside of the disc.




                              74                                                                                                                PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                  Microfone kit (part no. 0006953)




17          Accessories

17.1        Microfone kit (part no. 0006953)
            This unit enables the use of the jukebox as a paging
            system, when playing as well as during idling periods.
            If the paging microphone is switched on while the
            jukebox is playing, the music will be muted for this pe-
            riod. This kit is to be connected at the microphone so-
            cket of the amplifier. The length of the cable between
            mike pre-amp and the jukebox is approx. 45 ft / 15 m.




                                                                                                                       FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
17.2        BGM-Connector
            This equipment offers two features:

            1.   The sound of an external source (300mV - 1V),                   Extern.                F91
                                                                                                       Amplif.
                                                                                 Amplif.
                 e.g. radio or tape, will be reproduced over the
                 speakers of the jukebox with adjustable volume.
                                                                          L                                      R
                 A selection over the jukebox will mute this source,
                                                                         Ext.                             F91 Amp.
                 and it returns only after all selections have been      Ampl                               Aux.
                 played. (Time-lag can be adjusted).                      R                                       L



            2.   Connecting the jukebox to        an    existing back-    R
                                                                                        0048133                   L
                 ground system (amplifier),     the     sound of this    Ext.                                  CD
                 equipment is switched off as   long    as the jukebox   Tape                CD               Player
                                                                                            Player
                 is playing. The hook-up for     this   adapter is the    L                                      R

                 same as the microphone.                                                        Ext.
                                                                                                Tape



            BGM connector kit, part no. 0048130.                                +7,5V    F91
                                                                                        Ampl.          Time
                                                                                -7,5V   Micro



                                                                                  Music/BGM
                                                                                   Connector




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                                   75
                       Treating simple errors




                       18          Steps to solve mechanical problems
                                   In case of a mechanical error the software tries to solve the problem itself. If this is not successful the
                                   mechanism switches itself off. Then the display shows an error code (ref. to chapt. 7.3. page 64).
                                   The jukebox is then out of order.


                       18.1        Treating simple errors
                                   Switch the jukebox off and on several times. (The software tries to solve the problem again.) No suc-
                                   cess ? Step to chapter 18.2.


                       18.2        Treating simple errors by hand

                                   1.    Switch off the jukebox

                                   2.    Move the gripper by pressing against the motor as far as the CD can be taken out by hand.

                                   3.    Take the CD out of the gripper.

                                   4.    Insert the CD in the corresponding compartment.

                                   5.    Switch on the jukebox, it will be run automatically:
                                         # Error elimination
                                         # Initializing phase
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                         # jukebox ok.

                                   6.    No success ? Step to chapter 18.3.


                       18.3        Set the mechanism to ‘0’ position

                                   1.    Power OFF!

                                   2.    Open the Jukebox.

                                   3.    Open the mechanism housing, replace any CDs that may have been dropped.

                                   4.    Move gripper to RH. 0-position.
                                         # Move, by pressing against the gripper motor, gripper holder of selection sledge so that LH.
                                            side of gripper holder aligns with RH. side of pressure disc holder.
                                         # If RH. position impossible:
                                         # Move gripper to the LH. 0-position, so that right edge of gripper holder aligns with LH side
                                            pressure disc holder.

                                   5.    Remove the left magazine. (to reach the gear).

                                   6.    Position of the selection sledge.
                                         # The sledge has to be at least 1,3 ‘’ (3 cm) over the housing bottom. Therefore move the
                                            sledge up and down by hand using the toothed belt wheel on the top LH. side of gear group.

                                   7.    Insert the left magazine.




                              76                                                                                 PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                  Set the mechanism to ‘0’ position




            8.   Check the fixing of the magazines by hand.

            9.   Close the mechanism housing.

            10. Set the slide switch ‘SERVICE’ on the SCC unit to ON.

            11. Power ON.

            12. Delete the stored data of the jukebox.
                # Press ‘LT’ button
                # Press ‘LT’ button again and hold it for at least 6 sec.
                Followed by:
                # an automatic orientation phase
                # an automatic initialization phase
                # the display of the program version

            13. Programming
                # insert CDs if necessary
                # program number of inserted CDs in service level 1 button 5 as follows:

            14. Press selection button R -hold down- and press selection button 0 than release both buttons.
                # Press selection button 1. Service level 1 is reached. Display is: 1_ _ _.
                # To reprogram press selection button 5 -hold down- and press selection button R. Enter the
                   desired number of CDs with two digits. (exeption: 100 CDs = 00)
                # program options as desired




                                                                                                                      FIELD SERVICE MANUAL
            15. Switch to normal operation mode
                # Set the slide switch ‘SERVICE’ on the SCC unit to OFF.
                # Press ‘LT’ button on the SCC unit once.

            16. Close the jukebox.




PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007                                                                           77
                       Set the mechanism to ‘0’ position




                       19          Declaration of Conformity

                                                 Konformitätserklärung – Declaration of Conformity – Déclaration de Conformité

                                     Geräteart:                   Musikbox
                                     Product Description:         Jukebox
                                     Description Du Produit:      Juke-box

                                     Typenbezeichnung:            PRINCESS
                                     Model No.:
                                     Modèle No.:

                                     Angewandte EG-               73/23/EEC          Niederspannungsrichtlinie
                                     Richtlinien:                                    Low voltage directive
                                     Directives Complied with:                       Directive relaative aux appareils à basse tension
                                     Directives de la CE:
                                                                  89/336/EEC         Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
                                                                                     EMC Directive
                                                                                     Directive Relative à la compatibilité electromagnétique

                                     Technische Vorschriften:     EN 50081-1         Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
                                     Standards used:                                 Fachgrundnorm Störaussendung
                                     Régulation Technique:                           Electromagnetic compatibility
                                                                                     Generic Emissions Requirements
                                                                                     Compatibilité electromagnétique
                                                                                     Norme générique emission

                                                                  EN 50082-2         Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL




                                                                                     Fachgrundnorm Störaussendung
                                                                                     Electromagnetic Compatibility
                                                                                     Generic Emissions Requirements
                                                                                     Compatibilité electromagnétique
                                                                                     Norme générique emission

                                                                  EN 60335-1         Sicherheit elektrischer Geräte für den Hausgebrauch und
                                                                                     ähnliche Zwecke
                                                                                     Safety of household and similar
                                                                                     Electrical appliances
                                                                                     Sécurité des appareils electrodomestiques et analogues

                                                                  EN 60335-75        Grenzwerte und Messverfahren für Funkstörungen von
                                                                                     informationstechnischen Einrichtungen
                                                                                     Limits an methods of measurement of radio interference
                                                                                     characteristics of information technology equipment
                                                                                     Sécurité des appareils electrodomestiques et analogues

                                                                  EN 55022           Grenzwerte Und Meßverfahren Für Funkstörungen Von
                                                                                     Informationstechnischen Einrichtungen
                                                                                     Limits And Methods Of Measurement Of Radio
                                                                                     Interference Characteristics Of Information Technology
                                                                                     Equipment.

                                     Unterschrift/Signature/
                                     Signature

                                     Gedruckter Name/Print                                     Jürgen Obermeier
                                     name/nom

                                     Position/Position/Position               Chief Engineer/Technischer Leiter/Directeur Technique

                                     Datum/Date/Date                             2. Januar 1998/2. January 1998/2. Janvier 1998



                             78                                                                                    PRINCESS – Edition: 13.08.2007
                                                                                         R




Germany
Deutsche Wurlitzer GmbH
Wurlitzerstraße 6
D-32609 Hüllhorst
Tel.:   +49 (0) 57 44 - 941-0
Fax:    +49 (0) 57 44 - 941 220
contact@deutsche-wurlitzer.de

                                                                     Part no.: 0071126
Wurlitzer® A Registered Trademark of the Gibson Guitar Corporation   Edition 4708

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Stats:
views:29
posted:5/18/2011
language:English
pages:82